KE6910 - Switch ATEN - Free user manual and instructions

Name: KE6910
Brand: ATEN
Rating: 5 (261 reviews)

Find the device manual for free KE6910 ATEN in PDF.

📄 453 pages

EN ⬇ Download 💬 AI Question ❓ 10 questions ⚙️ Specs

Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

This manual is not available in your language

Desired language Your email address

Product Type	KVM Switch (Keyboard, Video, Mouse)
Model	KE6910
Brand	ATEN
Number of Ports	1 (Single Computer)
Video Resolution	Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
Connectivity	USB HID, VGA, Audio (Mic & Speaker)
Remote Access	IP-based (Ethernet) for KVM over IP
Power Input	USB bus-powered or external DC 5V (optional)
Dimensions (W x D x H)	Approx. 160 x 80 x 25 mm
Weight	Approx. 300 g
Operating Temperature	0°C to 50°C
Storage Temperature	-20°C to 60°C
Humidity	0% to 80% RH, non-condensing
LED Indicators	Power, Link, Activity
Supported Operating Systems	Windows, Mac, Linux, Sun
Security Features	Supports SSL/TLS encryption, user authentication
Maintenance	Keep clean with dry cloth; no liquid cleaners
Spare Parts / Repairability	No user-serviceable parts; contact ATEN support
General Information	Designed for remote server management and control

Frequently Asked Questions - KE6910 ATEN

How do I connect the KE6910 to my computer?

Connect the provided USB, VGA, and audio cables from the KE6910 to the corresponding ports on your computer. For remote access, connect the Ethernet cable to your network.

Can I use the KE6910 without an external power supply?

Yes, the KE6910 can be powered via USB bus from the connected computer. However, for stable operation, especially with longer cable runs, an optional external DC 5V power adapter is recommended.

What is the maximum video resolution supported?

The KE6910 supports video resolutions up to 1920x1200 at 60 Hz.

How do I access the KE6910 remotely?

Ensure the KE6910 is connected to your network. Use the ATEN KVM over IP software or a web browser to connect to the device's IP address. Default credentials are provided in the user manual.

Does the KE6910 support audio?

Yes, the KE6910 has built-in audio support for microphone and speaker pass-through.

Can I connect multiple KE6910 units?

The KE6910 is a single-port device. For multiple computers, consider using a multi-port KVM switch like ATEN's CS series.

What should I do if the video output is not displaying?

Check all cable connections, ensure the computer is powered on, and verify that the video resolution is within the supported range. Try using a different VGA cable or monitor.

How do I reset the KE6910 to factory defaults?

Press and hold the reset button (if available) for 10 seconds using a paperclip. Alternatively, perform a factory reset via the web interface under Maintenance settings.

Is the KE6910 compatible with Linux?

Yes, the KE6910 supports Linux operating systems via standard USB HID and VGA drivers. No additional software is required.

Where can I find the latest firmware for the KE6910?

Visit the ATEN support website and search for KE6910. The latest firmware and user manuals can be downloaded from the product page.

User questions about KE6910 ATEN

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Switch in PDF format for free! Find your manual KE6910 - ATEN and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. KE6910 by ATEN.

USER MANUAL KE6910 ATEN

KVM over IP Extender and

KVM over IP Matrix Manager

User Manual

Compliance Statements

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

The device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Caution

Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Warning

Operation of this equipment in a residential environment could cause radio interference.

Achtung

Industry Canada Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

CAN ICES-003 (A) / NMB-003 (A)

HDMI Trademark Statement

The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.

ATEN KE6910 - HDMI Trademark Statement - 1

RoHS

This product is RoHS compliant.

User Information

Online Registration

Be sure to register your product at our online support center:

International http://eservice.aten.com

Telephone Support

For telephone support, call this number:

International 886-2-86	92-6959
China 86-400-810-0-8	10
Japan 81-3-5615-581	1
Korea 82-2-467-6789
North America 1-888-	999-ATEN ext 4988
	1-949-428-1111

User Notice

All information, documentation, and specifications contained in this manual are subject to change without prior notification by the manufacturer. The manufacturer makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any warranties as to merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Any of the manufacturer's software described in this manual is sold or licensed as is. Should the programs prove defective following their purchase, the buyer (and not the manufacturer, its distributor, or its dealer), assumes the entire cost of all necessary servicing, repair and any incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect in the software.

The manufacturer of this system is not responsible for any radio and/or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this device. It is the responsibility of the user to correct such interference.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage incurred in the operation of this system if the correct operational voltage setting was not selected prior to operation. PLEASE VERIFY THAT THE VOLTAGE SETTING IS CORRECT BEFORE USE.

Product Information

For information about all ATEN products and how they can help you connect without limits, visit ATEN on the Web or contact an ATEN Authorized Reseller. Visit ATEN on the Web for a list of locations and telephone numbers:

International http://www.aten.com

North America http://www.aten-usa.com

Package Contents

Check to make sure that all the components are in working order. If you encounter any problem, please contact your dealer.

KE6900 / KE6940

KE6900T / KE6940T DVI Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter
1 USB DVI-D KVM cable
1 DVI-D cable (KE6940T only)
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions
KE6900R / KE6940R DVI Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Receiver:
1 Receiver
1 power adapter
1 user instructions

KE6900A / KE6940A

KE6900AT / KE6940AT DVI-I Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter
1 USB DVI-D KVM cable
1 DVI-D cable (KE6940AT only)
1 power adapter
1 foot pad et
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions

KE6900AR / KE6940AR DVI-I Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver

1 power adapter

1 user instructions

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT DVI Single / Dual Display KVM over IP Transmitter with Internet Port:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM cable

1 DVI-D cable (KE6940AiT only)

1 foot pad set (4 pcs)

1 power adapter

1 mounting kit

1 user instructions

KE6900ST

KE6900ST DVI KVM over IP Transmitter Lite:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM cable

1 foot pad set (4 pcs)

1 power adapter

1 mounting kit

1 user instructions

KE6910 / KE6912

KE6910T / KE6912T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM cable

1 power adapter (KE6910T only)

1 foot pad set (4 pcs)

1 mounting kit

1 user instructions

KE6910R / KE6912R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver

1 power adapter (KE6910R only)

1 user instructions

KE6910ATC

KE6910T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter:

2 Transmitter

2 USB DVI-D KVM cable

2 power adapter

2 mounting kit

2 user instructions

KE6910R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver

1 power adapter

1 user instructions

KE6920 / KE6922

KE6920T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter with Dual SFP / KE6922T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter with Dual SFP & PoE:

1 Transmitter

1 USB DVI-D KVM cable

1 power adapter (KE6920T only)

1 foot pad set (4 pcs)

1 mounting kit

1 user instructions

KE6920R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver with Dual SFP / KE6922R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver with Dual SFP & PoE:

1 Receiver
1 power adapter (KE6920R only)
1 user instructions

KE6920ATC

KE6920T DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Transmitter with Dual SFP:

2 Transmitter
2 USB DVI-D KVM cable
2 power adapter
2 mounting kit
2 user instructions

KE6920R DVI-D Dual Link KVM over IP Receiver with Dual SFP:

1 Receiver
1 power adapter
1 user instructions

KE8900S

KE8900ST Slim HDMI KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter
1 USB HDMI KVM cable
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter
1 mounting kit
1 HDMI Lockpro
1 user instructions
KE8900SR Slim HDMI KVM over IP Receiver:
1 Receiver

1 power adapter

1 mounting kit

1 H D M I L o c k p r o

1 user instructions

KE8950 / KE8952

KE8950T / KE8952T 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter

1 USB HDMI KVM cable

1 foot pad set (4 pcs)

1 power adapter (KE8950T only)

1 mounting kit

1 H D M I L o c k p r o

1 user instructions

KE8950R / KE8952R 4K HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver

1 power adapter (KE8950R only)

1 H D M I L o c k p r o

1 user instructions

KE9900ST

KE9900ST Slim DisplayPort KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter

1 DisplayPort cable

1 USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable

1 power adapter

1 mounting kit

1 user instructions

KE9950 / KE9952

KE9950T / KE9952T 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Transmitter:

1 Transmitter
1 DisplayPort cable
1 USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable
1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
1 power adapter (KE9950T only)
1 mounting kit
1 user instructions

KE9950R / KE9952R 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver
1 power adapter (KE9950R only)
1 user instructions

KE9950ATC

KE9950T 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Transmitter:

2 Transmitter
2 DisplayPort cable
2 USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable
2 power adapter
2 mounting kit
2 user instructions

KE9950R 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Receiver:

1 Receiver
1 power adapter
1 user instructions

Compliance Statements ...... ii

User Information iv

Online Registration iv

Telephone Support iv

User Notice iv

Product Information v

Package Contents ...... vi

KE6900 / KE6940 ...... vi

KE6900A / KE6940A.... vi

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

KE6900ST......vii

KE6910 / KE6912 ...... vii

KE6910ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

KE6920 / KE6922......viii

KE6920ATC ix

KE8900S ix

KE8950 / KE8952 ..... x

KE9900ST....x

KE9950 / KE9952 xi

KE9950ATC xi

Contents ..... xii

About This Manual .... xxii

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv

Chapter 1. Introduction

Overview 1

Features 4

Supported Video Resolutions ....7

Requirements 8

Operating System 8

Console....8

Computers 9

Cables....9

CCKM Requirements 9

Virtual Machine 10

Components 11

KE6900T (Transmitter) Front View 11

KE6900T (Transmitter) Rear View 12

KE6900R (Receiver) Front View 14

KE6900R (Receiver) Rear View 16

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Front View 18

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Rear View 19

KE6900AR (Receiver) Front View 21

KE6900AR (Receiver) Rear View 22

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Front View 24

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Rear View 25

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Front View 27

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Rear View 28

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Front View 30

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Rear View 31

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Front View 33

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Rear View 34

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Front View 36

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Rear View 37

KE6940T (Transmitter) Front View 39

KE6940T (Transmitter) Rear View 40

KE6940R (Receiver) Front View 42

KE6940R (Receiver) Rear View 44

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Front View 46

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Rear View 47

KE6940AR (Receiver) Front View 49

KE6940AR (Receiver) Rear View 50

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Front View 52

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Rear View 53

KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View ..... 55

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Front View 57

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Rear View 58

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Front View 60

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Rear View 61

KE8900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View 63

KE8900SR (Receiver) Front, Rear and Side View .....65

KE9900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View 67

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Front View 69

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Rear View 70

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Front View 72

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Rear View 73

PoE Power Redundancy....74

Chapter 2.Hardware Setup

Mounting....75

Attaching the Mounting Bracket 76

Non-Slim Transmitters....76

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST 77

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST 77

Rack Mount 79

Non-Slim Transmitters....79

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST 80

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST 80

Wall Mount 81

Non-Slim Transmitters....81

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST 82
Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST ..... 82
KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation .....83
KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. 84
KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 86
KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 ..... 87
KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 .....88
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation ..... 89
KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 ..... 90
KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 ..... 91
KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation .....92
KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 ..... 94
KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 95
KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 .....97
KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation .....98
KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 ..... 100
KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 101
KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2 .... 102
KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 ....103
KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation .....104
KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
KE6900ST Point-to-Point Installation .....107
Setting up a LAN Installation .....107
KE8900S Point-to-Point Installation 109
Setting up a LAN Installation .....109
KE9900ST Point-to-Point Installation .....111
Setting up a LAN Installation .....111
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation .....113
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
KE9950ATC Point-to-Point Installation 116
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation .....119
KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 .....121
KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KE6900A / KE6940A LAN Installation 123
KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 .....124
KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 .....125
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT LAN Installation 126
KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 127

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 ..... 128

KE6910 / KE6912 LAN Installation 129

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 130

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . 131

KE6910ATC LAN Installation 132

KE6910ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 133

KE6910ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 ..... 134

KE6920 / KE6922 LAN Installation 135

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . 136

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . 137

KE6920ATC LAN Installation 138

KE6920ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

KE6920ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation 141

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 143

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . 144

KE9950 / KE9952 LAN Installation 145

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 146

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2. . . . . . . . . . . . 147

KE9950ATC LAN Installation 148

KE9950ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2 ..... 149

KE9950ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Network Configuration 151

Exit OSD 152

Default IP Addresses 152

KE ATC Series Bundle Hotkey 153

KE I/O Ports 155

LED Display 156

Chapter 3.OSD Operation

Overview....157

Invoking the OSD 157

Touch Screen Calibration 157

OSD Hotkeys 158

Non-OSD Hotkeys. 158

Reverting to Previous 158

Hotkey Mode 158

Microphone Hotkey 159

OSD Interface....159

Logging in for the First Time 160

Receiver Configuration 161

Network....161

Properties 162

Regular Version....162

Slim Version 165

System 167

Transmitter Configuration 168

Network....168

Properties 169

System 172

Internet Port (AiT Models only) 173

IP Installer 174

Service Ports 174

IPv4 Settings 174

IPv6 Settings 175

CCVSR 176

Working Mode 176

User Preferences ....177

OSD Matrix Mode 178

Connections Page....179

List Mode 179

Array Mode 182

Profile Page 184

Push Content 185

Pull Content 187

Chapter 4. Software Installation

Overview 189

Download 189

KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install .....191

Upgrading License 194

Linux Installation 195

Chapter 5.Browser / Telnet Operation

Overview 199

Logging In....199

The KVM over IP Matrix Manager Main Page 20

Web Components .....201

Installation Wizard 203

Adding Transmitters and Receivers .....204

Adding Network Switches .....207

Instant Link 209

RS-232 / Telnet 211

Telnet 211

RS-232 212

Configuration Menu....213

Main Menu....213

Network 214
Properties 214
System 215

Chapter 6. System Status

Overview 217

System Status 218

Transmitter 220

SFP Module Detection 221

Transmitter Configuration 222

Internet Port (AiT models only) 227

Basic 228

CCVSR 229

Mode 229

Private Certificate 230

Certificate Signing Request 231

Copy & Paste 233

Virtual Transmitter....234

Intelligent Dual Video Output Management 236

Transmitter Group 237

Transmitter Permissions 238

Receiver 240

SFP Module Detection 241

Receiver Configuration 242

Copy & Paste 245

Receiver Group 247

Video Wall....248

Receiver Permissions 251

Switch 252

Network Switch Configuration....253

Port Configuration 254

Account 255

Users 256

Adding Users. 256

Modifying Users 258

Deleting Users 258

Groups 259

Adding Groups 259

Modifying Groups 260

Deleting Groups 260

Permissions 261

Assigning Device Permissions 261

Profile 263

Adding a Profile 264

Adding a Schedule 267

Log 268

Chapter 7. System Settings

Overview....269

General....269

Connection Redundancy 272

ANMS 276

Event Destination .....276

Authentication & Authorization .....278

SNMP 281

FW Upgrade ....282

Firmware Upgrade Recovery 283

Redundancy 284

Private Certificate 288

Certificate Signing Request .....289

Sessions 291

Chapter 8.Connections

Overview 293

Connections 294

Chapter 9. Scheduled Profile

Overview 297

Chapter 10.Sessions

Overview 299

Chapter 11. KE Link App

Overview 301

Requirements 301

Accessing CCKM 301

Monitoring 303

Adjusting Preview Size ....303

Searching for a Device 303

Checking a Receiver's Tx-Connection 304

Connecting Tx-Rx 305

Access Types 306

Logout....306

Chapter 12. Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

Introduction....307

Windows and Java Client Viewer (web access) .....308

The Windows/Java Client AP 310

Download 310

Starting Up .311

The Control Panel 313

Control Panel Functions .....314

Macros 316

Hotkeys 316

Video Settings 318

Gamma Adjustment 319

Virtual Media 321

Virtual Media Icons 321

Virtual Media Redirection 321

Smart Card Reader 324

Zoom. 324

The On-Screen Keyboard 325

Mouse Pointer Type 326

Mouse DynaSync Mode 326

Automatic Mouse Synchronization (DynaSync) 327

Manual Mouse Synchronization 327

Control Panel Configuration 328

Chapter 13.Firmware Upgrade Utility

Preparation....331

Starting the Upgrade 332

Upgrade Succeeded 334

Firmware Upgrade Recovery 335

Chapter 14.CLI Commands

Serial Control Protocol Commands 337

Configuring the Serial Port 337

Device/Profile Commands 338

Telnet 338

Verification 338

Switch Port Command 339

Mute Command 343

Profile Command 345

EDID Command 347

Reset Command 349

RS-232 Command 350

OSD Command 353

List Command 354

Read Command 356

Set Command 360

Appendix

Safety Instructions 369

General 369

Rack Mount 371

Technical Support 372

International 372

North America 372

Specifications 373

KE6900T / KE6940T 373

KE6900R / KE6940R 375

KE6900AT / KE6940AT 376

KE6900AR / KE6940AR 378

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT 379

KE6900ST 381

KE6910 382

KE6912 384

KE6920....386

KE6922 388

KE8900S 390

KE8950T / KE8952T 391

KE8950R / KE8952R 393

KE9900ST 395

KE9950 396

KE9952 398

Optional Rack Mount 400

Dual Rack Mount....400

Transmitter Dual Rack Mount 400

Receiver Dual Rack Mount 402

Single Rack Mount 404

IP Installer 406

Trusted Certificates 407

Overview 407

Self-Signed Private Certificates 408

Examples 408

Importing the Files 408

Reset All Information 409

Default Password Pins 410

RS-232 Pin Assignments 416

Transmitter Front RS-232 Port 416

Multicast IP Address 417

KE Multicast Rule 417

Multicast IP Formula 417

If X is between 0 \~ 127 .....417

If X is between 128 \~ 192 .....418

If X is 192 or higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Keys to Network Performance 419

Build a Network Diagram. 419

Other Factors....419

Choose a High Performance Switch 421

Layer 2 or Layer 3 Switches .....421

Considerations 421

Number of ports 421

Stackable verse Standalone 421

What Stackable Switches Can do:....422

Switch Specifications. 422
Configuring Switches and KE Devices 423
KE transmitter Settings: 423
Recommended Network Switches 423
Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures 425
Windows: 425
Sun / Linux 426
Virtual Media Support 427
WinClient ActiveX Viewer / WinClient AP 427
Java Applet Viewer / Java Client AP....427
Setup CCKM Server IP address on Windows 428
Limited Warranty....429

About This Manual

This manual is provided to help you get the most out of your KVM over IP Matrix System. It covers all aspects of the device and system, including installation, configuration, and operation.

The KVM over IP Extender models covered in this user manuals are:

Models P	Product Names
KE6900 DVI	Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6900A D	VI-I Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6900AiT	DVI-I Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter) with Internet Access
KE6900ST	DVI KVM over IP Extender Lite
KE6910 DVI	-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6912 DVI	-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with PoE
KE6920 DVI	-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with Dual SFP
KE6922 DVI	-D Dual Link KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with Dual SFP & PoE
KE6940 DVI	Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6940A D	VI-I Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE6940AiT	DVI-I Dual Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter) with Internet Access
KE8900S S	im HDMI KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE8950 4K	HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE8952 4K	HDMI Single Display KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with PoE
KE9900ST	Slim DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter)
KE9950 4K	DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver)
KE9952 4K	DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (Transmitter & Receiver) with PoE

An overview of the information found in the manual is provided below.

Chapter 1, Introduction, introduces you to the KVM over IP Matrix System, its purpose, features, and benefits, with its front and back panel components described.

Chapter 2, Hardware Setup, provides step-by-step instructions for setting up your installation, and explains some basic operation procedures.

Chapter 3, OSD Operation, explains the fundamental concepts involved in operating the KE6900 / KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6900ST / KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922 / KE6940 / KE6940A / KE6940AiT / KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952 / KE9900ST / KE9950 / KE9952, and provides a complete description of the On Screen Displays (OSDs) and the functions contained.

Chapter 4, Software Installation, explains the administrative procedures that are required to download and install the KVM over IP Matrix Manager on Windows and Linux systems.

Chapter 5, Browser / Telnet Operation, explains how to log in to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager with a web browser, and describes the various functions provided.

Chapter 6, System Status, explains how to use the KVM over IP Matrix Manager's system status panel to manage transmitters, receivers, switches, users, profiles, and logs.

Chapter 7, System Settings, explains the KVM over IP Matrix Manager's system settings, which are categorized into General, ANMS, LDAP/AD, RADIUS, TACACS+ authentication, F/W Upgrade, Redundancy, Backup/Restore, Certificates, and Sessions tabs.

Chapter 8, Connections, describes how to use the KVM over IP Matrix Manager ‘s connections panel to quickly view, connect, and disconnect Transmitter-Receiver connections.

Chapter 9, Scheduled Profile, describes how to use the KVM over IP Matrix Manager's scheduled profile panel to view and manage profile schedules.

Chapter 10, Sessions, describes how to use the KVM over IP Matrix Manager's sessions panel to view and disconnect user sessions.

Chapter 11, KE Link App, introduces the KE (Instant) Link app, which allows users to monitor and manage the CCKM server remotely from an iPad.

Chapter 12, Remote Viewer (AiT Models only), describes how to use remote viewer(s) to view and control video sources connected to AiT transmitters.

Chapter 13, Firmware Upgrade Utility, explains how to download and use the Firmware Upgrade Utility for upgrading the firmware of the devices connected.

Chapter 14, CLI Commands, provides a complete list of the serial protocol and TCP/IP commands used when utilizing the RS-232 serial port or a network connection to configure the KE devices.

Appendix, provides the technical and troubleshooting information of KE devices at the end of the manual.

Note:

Read this manual thoroughly and follow the installation and operation procedures carefully to prevent any damage to the unit or connected devices.
The product may be updated, with features and functions added, improved or removed since the release of this manual. For an up-to-date user manual, visit http://www.aten.com/global/en/

Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions:

Monospaced Indicates text that you should key in.

[] Indicates keys you should press. For example, [Enter] means to press the Enter key. If keys need to be chorded, they appear together in the same bracket with a plus sign between them: [Ctrl+Alt].

Numbered lists represent procedures with sequential steps.

◆ Bullet lists provide information, but do not involve sequential steps.

Indicates selecting consecutive options (such as on a menu or dialog box). For example, Start > Run means to open the Start menu, and then select Run.

ATEN KE6910 - Conventions - 1

Indicates critical information.

Overview

The KVM over IP Matrix System is a solution that combines KE Series KVM over IP Extenders (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT, KE6940, KE6940A, KE6940AiT, KE6900ST, KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE8900S, KE8950, KE8952, KE9900ST, KE9950, KE9952), with the KVM over IP Matrix Manager (CCKM) to extend, control and monitor access to computers, across a network, in a multitude of ways. The system lets you setup a matrix of remote KVM consoles that access computers across a network, with the flexibility to control and configure each connection.

The high-performance IP-based KE Extenders are consisted of a transmitter and a receiver. The transmitter connects to a computer to deliver the computer's data to the receiver to collectively provide console access from a remote or separate location. The computer can be accessed from the remote console via a standard TCP/IP network or direct Ethernet cable connection. This is perfect for any installation where you need to place the console where it is convenient, but you want the computer to reside in a secure location — away from the keyboard, mouse and display.

The extenders support flawless and lossless video compression quality with ultra low latency, some extenders also support 2K x 2K video resolution (2048 x 2048 @ 60Hz), which is used widely in the Air Traffic Control (ATC) industry. For a list of video resolution support, refer to Supported Video Resolutions on page 7.

For power redundancy, some extenders have dual power supplies, some provide single power supply with a Power over Ethernet (PoE) LAN port, while some provide dual power supplies and a PoE LAN port.

Some extenders support Fiber Channel over Ethernet via SFP fiber modules* which connect to a network switch at speeds up to 1 Gbps. The extenders can connect unit-to-unit or over a TCP/IP network via Gigabit Ethernet or the SFP ports. Connecting both methods allows network failover.

The non-slim KE over IP Extenders have local On Screen Display (OSD) on the receiver end to configure both receiver and transmitter — for easy setup and operation. Both the transmitter and receiver have RS-232 ports to connect

to a serial terminal for configuration or serial devices such as touchscreens and barcode scanners.

The AiT models can connect to an Office LAN to support the Control Center Video Session Recorder (CCVSR) software and WinClient/JavaClient. The CCVSR records all operations made on servers accessed through KVM over IP switches. Every operation and change are recorded and saved to a secure video file for security reference and troubleshooting purposes, etc. By using WinClient/JavaClient, you are provided with console access from a separate location over intranet and/or Internet.

Slimmer versions of KE over IP Extenders are also available. These are KE6900ST, KE8900S or KE9900ST, and are cost and space saving alternatives for installations with extenders that don't need a local console or audio transmission, but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models. KE6900ST is a slim KVM over IP Transmitter that supports DVI input. KE8900S offers a slim KVM over IP Transmitter (KE8900ST) and a slim KVM over IP Receiver (KE8900SR) to respectively support HDMI video input from the computer and one HDMI monitor output. KE9900ST is a slim KVM over IP Transmitter that supports DisplayPort input. In addition to a DC power jack, both the KE8900ST and KE9900ST transmitters have an extra DC terminal block each for convenient installation.

Since different KE over IP Extenders support different types of video interfaces (DVI, HDMI, DisplayPort, etc.), video resolutions, power redundancy function and network failover feature, administrators/users may select and tailor what is currently best for your environment, and for expected or unexpected future expansions.

Refer to the table below for the variations in interfaces, functions and features:

Models	DVI HDMI DisplayPort			Power Redundancy via PoE*	Power Redundancy via Second Power Jack	Network Failover - SFP
KE6900 1 -	- - -
KE6900A 1	- - - 1 1
KE6900AiT	1 - - - 1 1
KE6900ST	- - - -
KE6910 1 -	- - 1 1
KE6912 1 -		1 - 1
KE6920 1 -	- - 1 2
KE6922 1 -		1 1 2
KE6940 2 -	- - -
KE6940A 2	- - - 1 1
KE6940AiT	2 - - - 1 1
KE8900S	- 1 - -		-
KE8950	- 1 - - - 1
Models	DVI HDMI	Display	Port	Power Redundancy via PoE*	Power Redundancy via Second Power Jack	Network Failover - SFP
KE8952 - 1	- 1 - 1
KE9900ST	- 1 ---
KE9950 --	- 1 1
KE9952 --	1 - 1

*Power redundancy via PoE requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).

KVM over IP Extenders allow flexible setup as they can make console-to-computer connections in several ways: one-to-one (Extender mode), one-to-many (Splitter mode), many-to-one (Switch mode), or many-to-many (Matrix mode).

The KVM over IP Matrix Manager (CCKM) allows you to define the aforementioned matrix connections and manage KE Extenders with features such as auto-detection of KE Extenders, username/password authentication, switching and sharing of connections, scheduling, permissions and more. Whether you're extending computer access for Monitoring, Broadcasting, Editing or Workstation setup, the KVM over IP Matrix System gives you the flexibility and control to manage one or hundreds of extended connections. For more detailed feature list, refer to Features on page 4.

Note: The SFP module is sold separately. You can choose the 2A-136G, a multi-mode SFP module that provides 1 GbE connectivity up to 550 meters; or the 2A-137G, a single-mode SFP module that provides 1 GbE connectivity up to 10 kilometers. Visit ATEN's website or contact your ATEN dealer for more information.

Features

Remote KVM console access of computers over LAN or Ethernet cable connection
Dual console operation — control your system from both the Transmitter and Receiver by USB keyboard, monitor, and mouse
RS-232 serial portsallows you to connect to a serial terminal for configuration, and serial devices such as touchscreens and barcode scanners ^1
Superior video quality ^2 — up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz with 24-bit color depth (KE69 Series / KE8900S); up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4) with 24-bit color depth (KE99 Series); and up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0), 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4) (KE8950 / KE8952)
Supports standard resolutions from 640 x 480 to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz (KE69 Series / KE8900S); resolutions from 640 x 480 to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 (KE99 Series), and 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0), 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4) (KE8950 and KE8952)
◆ Supports 2K x 2K video resolution (2048 x 2048 @ 60 Hz) (KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922)
♦ OSD (On Screen Display) on the Receiver configures Tx / Rx devices
◆ Supports KVM over IP Matrix Manager Web GU administration ^3
◆ Supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) functionality — compliant with IEEE 802.3at and 802.3af standards (KE6912, KE6922, KE8952 and KE9952)
Boundless Switching — simply move the mouse cursor across screen boundaries to switch between different receivers
Intelligent Dual Video Output Management — split two video sources from a dual display Transmitter and connect to each from different Receivers (KE6940/KE6940A)
♦ Gigabit Ethernet port
◆ Remote login security
DVI digital and analog monitor support (KE6900 / KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6900ST / KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922 / KE6940 / KE6940A / KE6940AiT)
♦ HDMI monitor support (KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952)
◆ DisplayPort monitor support (KE9900ST / KE9950 / KE9952)
◆ Built-in ESD protection and surge protection
Supports 2 channel analog (KE69 Series) and 7.1 channel surround sound (KE89 / KE99 Series) stereo speakers and microphone
Auto-MDIX — automatically detects cable type
◆ Supports widescreen formats
◆ Supports High-Quality Video streaming
◆ Virtual Media Support
Hot pluggable
Rack Mountable
Upgradeable firmware
Supports digital audio (KE8900S / KE8950 / KE8952 / KE9900ST / KE9950 / KE9952)
Adaptive Fast Switching — automatically fast switches between different Tx video resolutions on a Rx display within 0.3 second (KE6910/KE6912)
Authentication Lock — automatically logs in when the power of the system is resumed after power off
Connection Redundancy — automatically connects to another transmitter (Tx) after disconnection with the original Tx, ensuring constant access to servers (KE6900A / KE6900AiT / KE6910 / KE6912 / KE6920 / KE6922 / KE6940A / KE6940AiT)
Disconnection Alert — Pop-up warning message and looping alarm beeping notify users the disconnection status (KE6910/KE6912)
Instant Link — Switch intuitively and efficiently between transmitter (Tx) on a receiver (Rx) display
Supports recording of remotely-accessed computer operations using ATEN CCVSR Video Session Recording Software
“Push” and “Pull” — shares content instantly to/from a single Rx or video wall by just one click
Video Walls — create multiple video walls with up to 8 x 8 (64 displays max.) in each layout
Four selectable access modes for multiple simultaneous access (Exclusive/ Occupy/Share/ View only mode)
◆ Supports remote access via WinClient / JavaClient over intranet or Internet
Rx access control — users at the Tx local console can enable / disable Rx access by simply pressing a control button ^4

Note: 1. RS-232 serial ports support Tx/Rx/CTS/RTS/DTR/DSR signals only.

Refer to Supported Video Resolutions below for details.
The KVM over IP Matrix Manager web GUI can be updated from the CCKM page on our website (www.aten.com) or via eService website (http://eservice.aten.com). The free version supports up to 8 KE devices. To obtain a license for the full version of the software, please contact your ATEN dealer.
The KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G) is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

Supported Video Resolutions

Resolutions	KE6900 / KE6940 KE6900A / KE6940A KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT	KE6910 / KE6912 KE6920 / KE6922	KE8950 / KE8952	KE9950 / KE9952	KE6900ST / KE8900S / KE9900ST
3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0) ●
3840 x 2160 @ 24/25/30 Hz ●
3440 x 1440 @ 50 Hz ●
2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz ●
2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz ●	●
2560 x 1440 @ 60 Hz ●	●
2560 x 1080 @ 24/25/30/50/60/100/120 Hz			●
2048 x 2048 @ 30/60 Hz ●
2048 x 1536 @ 60 Hz ●	●
2048 x 1536 @ 30 Hz ●
2048 x 1152 @ 60 Hz ●
1600 x 1600 @ 60 Hz ●
1920 x 2160 @ 60 Hz ●
1920 x 2160 @ 30 Hz ●	●
1920 x 1440 @ 60 Hz ●	●
1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz ●	●		●		●
1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz ●	●		●		●
1600 x 1200 @ 60 Hz ●	●		●		●
1680 x 1050 @ 60 Hz ●	●		●		●
1400 x 1050 @ 60 Hz ●	●		●		●
1280 x 1024 @ 60/75 Hz ●	●		●		●
1280 x 960 @ 60 Hz ●	●		●		●
1280 x 800 @ 60 Hz ●
1600 x 900 @ 60 Hz ●	●		●		●
1440 x 900 @ 60 Hz ●	●		●		●
1152 x 864 @ 75 Hz ●	●		●		●
1366 x 768 @ 60 Hz ●	●		●		●
1280 x 720 @ 60 Hz ●	●		●		●
1024 x 768 @ 60/70/75/85 Hz ●	●			●	●
848 x 480 @ 60 Hz ●
800 x 600 @ 56/60/72/75/85 Hz	●	●			●
720 x 400 @ 70/85 Hz ●	●		●		●
640 x 480 @ 60/72/75/85 Hz ●	●		●		●

Requirements

Operating System

KE series devices are compatible with the following operating systems:

OS Versions
Windows 32	-bit XP / 7	/8
	64-bit XP	/7 /8 /8.1 /10 /Server 2008 R2 / Server 2012 / Server 2016 / Server 2019
Linux		◆CentOS◆Ubuntu◆openSUSE◆Red Hat

Mac OS
Oracle Solaris

Console

(KE6900/KE6900A/KE6900AiT/KE6900ST/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922) One DVI compatible monitor capable of the highest possible resolution
♦ (KE6940/KE6940A/KE6940AiT) Two DVI compatible monitors capable of the highest possible resolution
(KE8900S/KE8950/KE8952) One HDMI compatible monitor capable of the highest possible resolution
(KE9900ST/KE9950/KE9952) One DisplayPort compatible monitor capable of the highest possible resolution
A USB mouse
A USB keyboard
◆ Microphone and speakers

Computers

The following ports must be available on each computer that is to be connected to the system:

♦ (KE6900/KE6900A/KE6900AiT/KE6900ST/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922) One DVI port
♦ (KE6940/KE6940A/KE6940AiT) Two DVI ports
♦ (KE8900S/KE8950/KE8952) One HDMI port
♦ (KE9900ST/KE9950/KE9952) One DisplayPort port
USB Type A port
◆ Audio ports

Cables

- For optimal signal integrity and to simplify the setup, we strongly recommend that you only use the high quality custom USB KVM Cable that is provided with this package.

CCKM Requirements

The minimum hardware and software requirements for the computer running the KVM over IP Matrix Manager are:

◆ Processor: Pentium 4, 2.60 GHz or above
◆ Memory: 1 GB or above
♦ HDD: 500 MB or above
- Web browser: Internet Explorer 10 (or later), Chrome 70 (or later), Firefox 62 (or later)
♦ Operating System Requirements:

◆ Windows 7, 8.1, 10, server 2008, server 2012, or server 2016
♦ Linux Ubuntu 16.04, CentOS 7

Note: Only Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 8 and OpenJDK 8 are supported.

Virtual Machine

CCKM supports the following virtual machine and versions:

OS Versions
VMware ESXi		◆ 4.x (4.0)◆ 5.x (5.0, 5.1, 5.5)◆ 6.x (6.0)


XenServer		◆ 2.5◆ 4.0◆ 5.x (5.0, 5.5)◆ 6.x (6.0)


Hyper-v		◆ on Win 7 / 8.1 / 10◆ on Windows Server 2008 / 2012 / 2016 / 2019

Components

KE6900T (Transmitter) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 1

text_image

ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation (local or remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
6	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6900T (Transmitter) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 2

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

No.	Component Description
6 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
9 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

KE6900R (Receiver) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 3

text_image

POWER LANLOCAL RESMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.		Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:Orange: 10 MbpsOrange + Green: 100 MbpsGreen: 1000 MbpsOff when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream audio or video data, such as speakers or webcams, will not work.

KE6900R (Receiver) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 4

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

No.	Component Description
1	grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2	reset button This button	must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Information on page 409.
3	audio ports	These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4	USB port Use this port	for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note:1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, seeUSB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream audio or video data, such as speakers or webcams, will not work.
5	power jack The cable	from the DC power adapter connects here.
6	function switch Use th	is slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7	RS-232 port This RS-	232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.

No.	Component Description
8	console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.Note:When using a keyboard or mouse with special functions, seeUSB Mode, page 244.
9	LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10	DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 5

text_image

ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation (Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
6	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6900AT (Transmitter) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 6

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:

KE6900AR (Receiver) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 7

text_image

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆Orange: 10 Mbps◆Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆Green: 1000 Mbps◆Off when not connected to the LAN.
3	local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4	remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5	graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6	OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7	video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8	USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note:1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE6900AR (Receiver) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 8

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
3	audio portsThese mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
6 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.

No.	Component Description
8	RS-232 port	This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
9	console ports The unit	t's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.Note:When using a keyboard or mouse with special functions, seeUSB Mode, page 244.
10	SFP slot The Gigabit	Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11	DVI-I output The cable	from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
12	power jack Connect	a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 9

text_image

ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation (Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
6	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6900AiT (Transmitter) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 10

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
5 Internet port Connect an Internet-enabled Ethernet cable to allow access to the web interface or CCVSR recording.
6 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 11

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	Remote / Local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation (Local or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.
5	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
6	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6910T / KE6912T (Transmitter) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 12

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 *

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
6 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE6912 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
9 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
11 power jack (KE6910T only)		Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 13

text_image

1 2 3 4 POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE6910R / KE6912R (Receiver) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 14

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 *

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
8 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
9 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE6912 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
10 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack (KE6910R only)		Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 15

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation (Local or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.
5	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
6	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6920T / KE6922T (Transmitter) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 16

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

No.	Component Description
6 RS-232 port This RS-232	serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE6922 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
9 SFP slots The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the LAN can be plugged here.
10 DVI-D output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
11 power jack Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 17

text_image

1 2 3 4 POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE6920R / KE6922R (Receiver) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 18

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.

No.	Component Description
7 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
8 console ports	The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
9 LAN	port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE6922 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
10 SFP	slots The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the LAN can be plugged here.
11 DVI-D	output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack	Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6940T (Transmitter) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 19

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation (Local or Remote) has KVM control of the computer.
5	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
6	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6940T (Transmitter) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 20

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.

No.	Component Description
6 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
9 DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitor plugs in here.

KE6940R (Receiver) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 21

text_image

POWER LANLOCAL 3 4 REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.		Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:Orange: 10 MbpsOrange + Green: 100 MbpsGreen: 1000 MbpsOff when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream audio or video data, such as speakers or webcams, will not work.

KE6940R (Receiver) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 22

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

No.	Component Description
1	grounding terminal The	wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2	reset button This button	must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 409.
3	audio ports	These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4	USB port Use this port	for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note:1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, seeUSB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream audio or video data, such as speakers or webcams, will not work.
5	power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6	function switch Use this	slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension:Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config:The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7	RS-232 port This RS-232	serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.

No.	Component Description
8	console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
9	LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10	DVI-I output The cable from the local DVI monitors plug in here.

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 23

text_image

ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable and the DVI cable supplied with the package plugs into these ports to link the Transmitter to the computer.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation (Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
6	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6940AT (Transmitter) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 24

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:

KE6940AR (Receiver) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 25

text_image

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆Orange: 10 Mbps◆Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆Green: 1000 Mbps◆Off when not connected to the LAN.
3	cocal LED Lights green to indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4	remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5	graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6	OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7	video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8	USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note:1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE6940AR (Receiver) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 26

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
3	audio portsThese mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
6 Power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.

No.	Component Description
8	RS-232 port	This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
9	console ports The unit	t's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.Note:When using a keyboard or mouse with special functions, seeUSB Mode, page 244.
10	SFP slot The Gigabit	Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11	DVI-I output The cables	from the local DVI monitors plug in here.
12	power jack Connect	a second power source for power redundancy.

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 27

text_image

ATEN 1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable and the DVI cable supplied with the package plugs into these ports to link the Transmitter to the computer.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation (Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
6	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE6940AiT (Transmitter) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - Components - 28

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
5 Internet port Connect an Internet-enabled Ethernet cable to allow access to the web interface or CCVSR recording.
6 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
7 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:

KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View

Front View
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View - 1

text_image

1 2

Top View
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View - 2

text_image

6 7

Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View - 3

text_image

3 4 5

No. Component Description

1 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.◆ Press and release to reboot the device.◆ Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.◆ Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
2 KVM port The USB KVM	cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 portThis RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.Note: When a LAN connection is detected serial commands bypass the KE6900ST and are sent across the network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is detected serial commands are automatically directed to the KE6900ST for local configuration and control.
4 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
No.	Component Description
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
7 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View - 4

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local LED Lights Green to indicate which side of the installation (Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
6	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE8950T / KE8952T (Transmitter) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View - 5

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

No.	Component Description
	1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
	2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
	3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
	4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
	5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
No.	Component Description
6 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 Console ports The unit's US	SB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE8952 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
9 SFP port The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10 HDMI output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View - 6

text_image

POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE8950R / KE8952R (Receiver) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View - 7

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

No.	Component Description
1	grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2	reset button This button	must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Informationon page 409.
3	audio ports	These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4	USB port Use this port	for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note:1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, seeUSB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5	power jack The cable	from the DC power adapter connects here.
6	function switch Use this	slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension:Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config:The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7	RS-232 port	This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.

No.	Component Description
8	console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.Note:When using a keyboard or mouse with special functions, seeUSB Mode, page 244.
9	LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE8952 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (seePoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
10	SFP port The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11	HDMI output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.

KE8900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Top View - 8

No. Component Description

1 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.

◆ Press and release to reboot the device.
◆ Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.
- Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.

No.	Component Description
2 LAN	LED This LED indicates the network status.Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:Orange: 10 MbpsOrange + Green: 100 MbpsGreen: 1000 MbpsOff when not connected to the LAN.
3 power	LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
4 LAN	port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
5 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.Note:When a LAN connection is detected serial commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is detected serial commands are automatically directed to the KE8900ST for local configuration and control.
6 USB	Type-B port The USB port that links the Transmitter to the computer.
7 HDMI	input The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.
8 3-pole terminal block	Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 ~ 48 V) to the terminal block for power input.
9 power	jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
10 grounding terminal	grounding The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

KE8900SR (Receiver) Front, Rear and Side View
ATEN KE6910 - No. Component Description - 1

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

No.	Component Description
1 USB peripheral port	Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints, therefore USB peripherals that stream audio or video data, such as speakers or webcams, will not work.
2 console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
3 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note:The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer toReset All Information on page 409.
4 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:Orange: 10 MbpsOrange + Green: 100 MbpsGreen: 1000 MbpsOff when not connected to the LAN.
5 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
6 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
7 RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.Note:When a LAN connection is detected serial commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is detected serial commands are automatically directed to the KE8900ST for local configuration and control.
8 HDMI output The cable from the local HDMI monitor plugs in here.
9 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
10 grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

KE9900ST (Transmitter) Front, Rear and Side View
ATEN KE6910 - No. Component Description - 2

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

No. Component Description

1 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.

◆ Press and release to reboot the device.
- Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.
- Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.

No.	Component Description
2 LAN	LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 power	LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
4 LAN	port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
5 RS	-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.Note:When a LAN connection is detected serial commands bypass the KE8900ST and are sent across the network to the receiver. When no LAN connection is detected serial commands are automatically directed to the KE8900ST for local configuration and control.
6 USB	Type-B port The USB port that links the Transmitter to the computer.
7 DisplayPort Input	The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in here.
8 3-pole terminal block	Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48V) to the terminal block for power input.
9 power jack	The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
10 grounding terminal	The wire used to ground the unit connects here.

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - No. Component Description - 1

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6

No.	Component Description
1	audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
2	KVM ports The USB KVM cable supplied with the package that links the Transmitter to the computer plugs into these ports.
3	RS-232 port This RS-232 serial port is for connecting to the computer for serial control.
4	remote / local LED Lights green to indicate which side of the installation (Local or Remote) currently has KVM control of the computer.
5	LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
6	power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.

KE9950T / KE9952T (Transmitter) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - No. Component Description - 2

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11*

No.	Component Description
	1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
	2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
	3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
	4 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
	5 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode to:Auto: Shared (simultaneous) KVM control of the computer at the Transmitter and Receiver console.*RS-232 Config/Access Control: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port. When connected to a KVM over IP Access Control Box (2XRT-0015G), users can enable / disable control privileges of the connected receivers.Local: Only the local Transmitter has KVM control of the computer. The Receiver's KVM access to the computer is locked.Note: In Auto mode, RS-232 and audio functions will work on the Receiver but not on the Transmitter.
6 RS-232 port This RS-232		serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
7 Console ports The unit's USB keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
8 LAN port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE9952 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
9 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
10 DisplayPort output The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in here.
11 power jack (KE9950T only)		Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Front View
ATEN KE6910 - No. Component Description - 3

text_image

1 2 3 4 POWER LAN LOCAL REMOTE Graphics OSD Video 5 6 7 8

No.	Component Description
1 power LED Lights blue to indicate the unit is turned on.
2 LAN LED This LED indicates the network status.◆ Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:◆ Orange: 10 Mbps◆ Orange + Green: 100 Mbps◆ Green: 1000 Mbps◆ Off when not connected to the LAN.
3 local LED Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM access of the computer.
4 remote LED Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM access of the computer.
5 graphics pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to the highest possible grade so that images are optimized. This toggle button turns off the Video Pushbutton option.Graphics mode is selected by default.
6 OSD pushbutton Use this pushbutton to open the OSD menu.
7 video pushbutton Sets the image quality of the display to a grade that is optimized for playing videos. This toggle button turns off the Graphics Pushbutton option.
8 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.

KE9950R / KE9952R (Receiver) Rear View
ATEN KE6910 - No. Component Description - 4

text_image

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12*

No.	Component Description
1 grounding terminal The wire used to ground the unit connects here.
2 reset button This button must be pushed with a thin object, such as the end of a paper clip.Press and release to reboot the device.Power off, hold reset then power on the device while pressing reset to recover from a firmware upgrade failure.Press and hold it in for more then three seconds resets the unit back to its factory default settings*.Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information (username/password) to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.
3 audio ports These mini stereo ports are for the local speakers (green) and microphone (pink).
4 USB port Use this port for virtual media or a USB peripheral device.Note: 1. When using a USB disk plugged into this port, see USB Mode, page 244.2. This USB port does not support isochronous endpoints and can support USB peripherals that stream audio but not video.
5 power jack The cable from the DC power adapter connects here.
6 function switch Use this slide switch to set the unit's mode:Extension: Sets the device to use the normal TX to RX extension mode.RS-232 Config: The device is ready to be configured via serial commands through the RS-232 port.
7 RS	-232 port This RS-232	serial port is for connecting to a serial terminal.
8 console ports The unit's USB		keyboard and USB mouse plug into these ports.
9 LAN	port The cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.This port is PoE enabled* for KE9952 for power redundancy or cable management.*Requires power board version B01G or later (see PoE Power Redundancy on page 74 for more details).
10 SFP slot The Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable that connects the unit to the LAN plugs in here.
11 DisplayPort output The cable from the local DisplayPort monitor plugs in here.
12 power jack (KE9950R only)		Connect a second power source for power redundancy.

PoE Power Redundancy

For power redundancy with PoE-enabled models, the unit's underside label must be printed with a "Power Board Version: B01G" string. An example is shown below and the string is indicated in the diagram:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

ATEN KE6910 - PoE Power Redundancy - 1

ATEN KE6910 - PoE Power Redundancy - 2
R-R-ATN-KE9952

ATEN KE6910 - PoE Power Redundancy - 3

ATEN KE6910 - PoE Power Redundancy - 4

ATEN KE6910 - PoE Power Redundancy - 5

Model Name: 4K DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender (PoE) (Receiver) Model No: KE9952R

Power Board Version: B01G

S/N:

ATEN KE6910 - PoE Power Redundancy - 6

ATEN KE6910 - PoE Power Redundancy - 7

text_image

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot

A1K3-130-0001

ATEN INTERNATIONAL CO., LTD Designed by ATEN in Taiwan & Canada

ATEN KE6910 - PoE Power Redundancy - 8

ATEN KE6910 - PoE Power Redundancy - 9

E3914

Made in Taiwan

Chapter 2 Hardware Setup

ATEN KE6910 - Hardware Setup - 1

Important safety information regard the placement of this device is found on. Please review it before proceeding.
Make sure that the power of all devices to be connected is turned off. You must unplug the power of any computers with Keyboard Power-on function.
Please operate the device with caution when under high environmental temperatures, as the surface of the device may become overheated under such conditions. For instance, the surface temperature of the device may reach 70 °C ( 158 °F ) or higher when the environmental temperature reaches close to 50 °C 122 °F .

Mounting

For convenience and flexibility, the transmitters can be mounted onto a system racks or wall.

Note: Optional mounting options are available, refer to Optional Rack Mount on page 400 for more information.

It is highly recommended to mount AiT unit(s) onto a system rack or wall and avoid a stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.

The following sections demonstrate how to mount transmitters using the mounting kit provided.

Attaching the Mounting Bracket

Follow the steps below to attach the mounting bracket to the unit:

Non-Slim Transmitters

Note: Steps for non-slim transmitters (KE6900, KE6900A, KE6900AiT, KE6910, KE6912, KE6920, KE6922, KE6940, KE6940A, KE6940AiT, KE8950, KE8952, KE9950, and KE9952) are the same, and are exemplified using KE6900.

Unscrew the screws from the side, as shown in the diagram below.

ATEN KE6910 - Non-Slim Transmitters - 1

text_image

M3 x 5

Use the screws from step 1 to attach the mounting bracket to the bottom of the transmitter, as shown below.

ATEN KE6910 - Non-Slim Transmitters - 2

text_image

M3 x 5 120000

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST

Using the screws from in the mounting kit, attach the mounting bracket to the bottom of the transmitter as shown below.

ATEN KE6910 - Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST - 1

text_image

M3 x 5

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST

The following diagrams are exemplified using KE8900ST.

Unscrew the screws from the side, as shown in the diagram below.

ATEN KE6910 - Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST - 1

text_image

M3 x 5

Use the screws from step 1 to attach the mounting bracket to the bottom of the transmitter, as shown below.

ATEN KE6910 - Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST - 2

text_image

M3 x 5

Rack Mount

Non-Slim Transmitters

Screw the mounting bracket on a convenient location of the rack.

ATEN KE6910 - Non-Slim Transmitters - 1

natural_image

Isometric line drawing of a server rack unit with attached device (no text or symbols)

Note: Rack screws are not provided. We recommend the use of M5 x 12 Phillips Type I cross recessed screws.

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST

Screw the mounting bracket on a convenient location of the rack.

ATEN KE6910 - Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST - 1

natural_image

Technical line drawing of a mechanical housing or enclosure with mounting holes and mounting screws (no text or symbols)

Note: Rack screws are not provided. We recommend the use of M5 x 12 Phillips Type I cross recessed screws.

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST

Screw the mounting bracket on any convenient location of the rack.

ATEN KE6910 - Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST - 1

natural_image

Diagram of a server rack with attached door and socket, showing internal components (no text or symbols)

Wall Mount

Non-Slim Transmitters

Use the center hole to screw the mounting bracket onto a secure wall surface.

ATEN KE6910 - Non-Slim Transmitters - 1

natural_image

Line drawing of a computer tower case with ventilation slots and ports (no text or symbols)

Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST

Use the center hole to screw the mounting bracket onto a secure wall surface.

ATEN KE6910 - Slim Transmitters — KE6900ST - 1

natural_image

Technical line drawing of a device rear panel with labeled ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST

Use the mounting bracket's center screw hole to mount the unit onto a wall.

ATEN KE6910 - Slim Transmitters — KE8900ST / KE9900ST - 1

natural_image

Technical line drawing of a device rear panel with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6900 / KE6940 system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, microphone and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6900T / KE6940T. Each port is labeled a corresponding icon for identification.*
Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM ports on the front of the KE6900T / KE6940T.
Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900T / KE6940T's LAN port.
Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE6900T / KE6940T's power jack.
On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6900R / KE6940R.**
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900R / KE6940R's LAN port.
Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE6900R / KE6940R's power jack.
Power on the computer.

Note: 1. If installing the KE6940 with two DVI monitors, connect the second DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940 and computer.

A keyboard or mouse with special functions may be required to be connected using the USB ports for the functions to work (see USB Mode, page 244).

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6900T"] --> B["Device 1"]
    A --> C["Device 2"]
    A --> D["Device 3"]
    A --> E["Device 4"]
    A --> F["Device 5"]
    A --> G["Device 6"]
    A --> H["Device 7"]
    A --> I["Device 8"]
    J["KE6900R"] --> K["Device 1"]
    J --> L["Device 2"]
    J --> M["Device 3"]
    J --> N["Device 4"]
    J --> O["Device 5"]
    J --> P["Device 6"]
    J --> Q["Device 7"]
    J --> R["Device 8"]

Note: The diagram above shows KE6900T and KE6900R. The KE6940 installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be connected at each end for a dual-display setup.

KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

ATEN KE6910 - KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

KE6900T 2 4 USB KVM cable Local PC

Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6900A / KE6940A system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

(Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extender's grounding terminal and a suitable grounded object.
On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the transmitter (KE6900AT/KE6940AT) ^1 .
Connect the DVI-D cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable provided with this package into the KVM ports on the front of the transmitter.
Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter's LAN port.
Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the receiver (KE6900AR/KE6940AR) ^2 .
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver's LAN port.
Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules ^3 .
Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks respectively.
(Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks.
Power on the computer.

Note: 1. If installing the KE6940A with two DVI monitors, connect the second DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940 and computer.

A keyboard or mouse with special functions may be required to be connected using the USB ports for the functions to work (see USB Mode, page 244).
The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6900AT (Rear)"] --> B["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    A --> C["Serial Device"]
    A --> D["DC 5V"]
    A --> E["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    F["KE6900AR (Rear)"] --> G["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    F --> H["Serial Device"]
    F --> I["DC 5V"]
    F --> J["Cat 5e/6 cable"]

Note: The diagram above shows KE6900AT and KE6900AR. The KE6940A installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be connected at each end for a dual-display setup.

KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

ATEN KE6910 - KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

KE6900AT (Front) ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable 3 4 5

Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6940AiT system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables. Since this is a transmitter-receiver setup, the below steps are demonstrated using a KE6940AR.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

It is highly recommended to mount the AiT unit(s) onto a system rack or wall, and avoid a stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

(Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extenders' grounding terminal and a suitable grounded object.
On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor(s), and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the transmitter (KE6900AiT/KE6940AiT).
Connect the KVM cable (DVI-D, USB, audio) and the DVI-D cable (KE6940AiT only) provided into the KVM ports on the front of the transmitter.
Connect the other end of the KVM cable (DVI-D, USB, audio) and the DVI-D cable (KE6940AiT only) into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor(s), and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the receiver (KE6940AR is used as the example here) ^1 .
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter's LAN port.
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver's LAN port.
To allow access to the web interface or CCVSR recording, use an Ethernet cable to connect the unit's Ethernet port to a network switch.
Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules ^2 .
Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks respectively.
(Optional) For power redundancy, connect another power adapter (available for purchase separately) to the power jack of each extender and make sure the adapter is powered.
Power on the computer.

Note: 1. For the advanced features of connecting a keyboard or mouse with special functions, see USB Mode, page 244.

The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6940AiT (Rear)"] -->|1| B["DC 12V"]
    A -->|2| C["Serial Device"]
    A -->|7| D["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    A -->|8| E["Office LAN"]
    A -->|9| F["DC 12V"]
    A -->|10| G["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    A -->|11| H["DC 5V"]
    A -->|12| I["KE6940AR (Rear)"]
    A -->|11| J["DC 5V"]
    A -->|12| K["Serial Device"]

Note: The diagram above shows a KE6940AiT installation with KE6940AR. The KE6900AiT installation is the same except with one less DVI monitor.

KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

ATEN KE6910 - KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

KE6940AiT (Front) ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable 3 4 5

Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6910 / KE6912 system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

(Optional) Use the grounding wire to connect the extender's grounding terminal to a suitable grounded object.
On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6910T / KE6912T.
Connect the USB DVI-D KVM cable provided with this package into the KVM ports and the audio ports on the front of the KE6910T / KE6912T.
Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6910T / KE6912T's LAN port.
On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6910R / KE6912R.
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6910R / KE6912R's LAN port.
Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect the KE6910 / KE6912 through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*
Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords; then plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks respectively. The KE6912 supports Power over Ethernet (PoE), thus the power can be supplied through PoE network switch, without the need of a power adapter.
(Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords; then plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks.**
Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

Available for KE6910T and KE6910R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information. Power redundancy forKE6912T and KE6912R can be achieved with the PoE function.

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation - 1

text_image

Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable KE6910T (Rear) DC 5V DC 5V KE6910R (Rear)

KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

ATEN KE6910 - KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

KE6910T (Front) USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6910ATC system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

(Optional) Use the grounding wire to connect the extender's grounding terminal to a suitable grounded object.
On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6910T.
Connect the USB DVI-D KVM cable provided with this package into the KVM ports and the audio ports on the front of the KE6910T.
Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the primary KE6910T's LAN port.
On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI-D monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6910R.
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6910R's LAN port.
Connect the SFP modules into the secondary KE6910T and KE6910R's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*
Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords; then plug the other ends into the KE6910T and KE6910R's power jacks respectively.
(Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords; then plug the other ends into the KE6910T and KE6910R's power jacks.**
Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

Available for KE6910T and KE6910R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["①"] --> B["②"]
    B --> C["③"]
    C --> D["④"]
    D --> E["⑤"]
    E --> F["⑥"]
    F --> G["⑦"]
    G --> H["⑧"]
    H --> I["⑨"]
    I --> J["⑩"]

    subgraph KE6910T (Rear) Primary
        K["KE6910T (Rear) Secondary"] --> L["DC 5V"]
        M["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"] --> N["DC 5V"]
        O["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"] --> P["DC 5V"]
        Q["KE6910T (Rear) Primary"] --> R["DC 5V"]
    end

    subgraph KE6910R (Rear)
        S["KE6910R (Rear)"] --> T["DC 5V"]
        U["KE6910R (Rear)"] --> V["DC 5V"]
        W["KE6910R (Rear)"] --> X["DC 5V"]
        Y["KE6910R (Rear)"] --> Z["DC 5V"]
        AA["KE6910R (Rear)"] --> AB["DC 5V"]
    end

    subgraph Optical Fiber Cable
        AC["Optical Fiber Cable"] --> AD["⑩"]
        AE["Optical Fiber Cable"] --> AF["⑪"]
    end

KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6910T Primary & Secondary (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6920 / KE6922 system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

(Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extender's grounding terminal and a suitable grounded object.
On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the transmitter (KE6920T/KE6922T).
Connect the DVI-D cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable provided with this package into the KVM ports on the front of the transmitter.
Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the transmitter's LAN port.
Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the receiver (KE6920R/KE6922R).
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the receiver's LAN port.
Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect the extenders through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules ^1 .
Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks respectively. The KE6922 supports Power over Ethernet (PoE), thus the power can be supplied through PoE network switch, without the need of a power adapter.
(Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks ^2 .

12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

Available for KE6920T and KE6920R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information. Power redundancy forKE6922T and KE6922R can be achieved with the PoE function.

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - Power on the computer. - 1

text_image

Cat 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable KE6920T (Rear) DC 5V Serial Device CAT 5e/6 cable Optical Fiber Cable KE6920R (Rear)

KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6920T (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable 3 4 5

KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE6920ATC system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

(Optional) Connect a grounding wire between the extender's grounding terminal and a suitable grounded object.
On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the KE6920T.
Connect the DVI-D cable and the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable provided with this package into the KVM ports on the front of the KE6920T.
Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the secondary KE6920T's LAN port.
Plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, and serial devices into the ports on the console section of the KE6920R.
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6920R's LAN port.
Connect the SFP modules into the primary KE6920T and KE6920R's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules ^1 .
Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the KE6920T and KE6920R's power jacks respectively.
(Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the KE6920T and KE6920R's power jacks ^2 .
Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

Available for KE6920T and KE6920R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6920T (Rear)"] -->|1| B["DC 5V"]
    A -->|2| C["Serial Device"]
    A -->|3| D["Computer"]
    A -->|4| E["KE6920T (Rear) PrimarySecondary"]
    A -->|5| F["DC 5V"]
    A -->|6| G["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    A -->|7| H["Serial Device"]
    A -->|8| I["KE6920R (Rear)"]
    A -->|9| J["Optical Fiber Cable"]

KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE6920T Primary & Secondary (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable 3 4 5

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE8950 / KE8952 system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE8950T / KE8952T. Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to indicate its function.
Connect the USB HDMI KVM cable provided into the KVM ports on the front of the KE8950T / KE8952T.
Connect the other end of the USB HDMI KVM cable into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE8950T / KE8952T's LAN port, or a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable to the SFP port.
Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE8950T / KE8952T's power jack.*
On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE8950R / KE8952R.
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE8950R / KE8952R's LAN port; or the other end of the Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable to the SFP port.
Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE8950R / KE8952R's power jack.*
Power on the computer.

Note: Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters.

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE8950T (Rear)"] --> B["Cat 5e/6 Cable"]
    A --> C["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    D["KE8950R (Rear)"] --> E["Cat 5e/6 Cable"]
    D --> F["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    G["DC 5V"] --> H["PC Computer"]
    I["DC 5V"] --> J["PC Tablet"]
    K["DC 5V"] --> L["PC Computer"]
    M["DC 5V"] --> N["PC Tablet"]

Note: Power adapters are not provided with the KE8952. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to the KE8952.

KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

ATEN KE6910 - KE8950 / KE8952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

KE8950T (Front) 2 4 USB HDMI KVM Cable Local PC

Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6900ST Point-to-Point Installation

The KE6900ST DVI KVM over IP Extender Lite is a cost-saving alternative for installations with transmitters that don't need a local console or audio transmission but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.

Setting up the KE6900ST system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:

Connect the USB DVI-D KVM cable (provided with this package) to the USB and DVI-D ports on the front of the KE6900ST.
Connect the other end of the USB DVI-D KVM cable to USB and DVI video ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the KE6900ST to a serial port on the computer.
Plug the power adapter (provided with this package) into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE6900ST's power jack.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE6900ST's LAN port.
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE69x0R's* LAN port.
On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, and DVI monitor into the ports on the console section of the KE69x0R.*
Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE69x0R's power jack.
Power on the computer.

Note: KE69x0R units are required and sold separately.

Setting up a LAN Installation

Setting up the KE6900ST on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE69x0 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To set up a LAN installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 5 above) to the network instead of directly between two KE69x0 devices and see KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation, page 119 for details.

ATEN KE6910 - Setting up a LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6900ST (Front)"] -->|USB KVM cable| B["Local PC"]
    C["KE6900ST (Rear)"] -->|Cat 5e/5 cable| D["Local PC"]
    B --> E["KE6900R"]
    E --> F["Computer"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

KE8900S Point-to-Point Installation

The KE8900S Slim HDMI KVM over IP Extender is a cost-saving alternative for installations that don't need a local console or audio transmission but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.

Setting up the KE8900S system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:

(Optional) Connect the grounding terminals of KE8900ST and KE8900SR to a suitable grounded object using grounding wires.
Connect the USB HDMI KVM cable provided between a computer and the KE8900ST. Please use the USB Type-B end of the USB HDMI KVM cable for the KE8900ST as it has a USB Type-B port.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable between the LAN ports of KE8900ST and KE8900SR.
Connect a USB mouse/keyboard to the front panel of the KE8900SR and HDMI monitor to the rear panel of the KE8900SR.
Plug the power adapters into power sockets, and plug the other ends respectively into the KE8900ST and KE8900SR's power jacks. For KE8900ST, you can choose to use the terminal block for power input. Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48 V) to the terminal block according to the icon.*
(Optional) For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the KE8900ST to a serial port on the computer.
Power on the computer.

Setting up a LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE Series devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. To set up a LAN installation, simply connect the Cat 5e/6 cable (in step 3) to the network instead of directly between two KE Series devices. As an example, please refer to KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation.

ATEN KE6910 - Setting up a LAN Installation - 1

text_image

KE8900ST (Rear) ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ DC 5V ⑥ KE8900SR (Rear) ① ⑤ ④ DC 5V

KE8900SR (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - Setting up a LAN Installation - 2

text_image

KE9900ST Point-to-Point Installation

The KE9900ST DisplayPort KVM over IP Extender Lite is a cost-saving alternative for installations with transmitters that don't need a local console or audio transmission but want the connectivity features of advanced KE models.

Setting up the KE9900ST system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables. Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next page and do the following:

(Optional) Connect the grounding terminal of the KE9900ST to a suitable grounded object using a grounding wire.
Connect the supplied DisplayPort cable between the DisplayPort ports of the computer and the KE9900ST.
With the supplied USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable, connect the USB Type-A end to the computer and the Type-B end to the KE9900ST.
(Optional) For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the KE9900ST to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable between the LAN ports of KE9900ST and the receiver unit* (e.g. KE8900SR).
Connect a USB mouse/keyboard and HDMI monitor to their respective ports on the KE8900SR.
Power the KE8900SR (e.g. plugging power adapter between the unit and a power socket).
Plug the power adapter into a power socket, and plug the other end into KE9900ST's power jack. Alternatively, you can choose to use the terminal block for power input. Insert DC + and - wires (DC 12 to 48 V) to the terminal block according to the icon.
Power on the computer.

Note: A KE Series receiver unit is required and sold separately.

Setting up a LAN Installation

of directly between two KE Series devices. As an example, please refer to KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation.

ATEN KE6910 - Setting up a LAN Installation - 1

text_image

KE9900ST (Rear) ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ DC 5V ⑦ ⑧ KE8900SR (Rear) ① ⑦ DC 5V

ATEN KE6910 - Setting up a LAN Installation - 2

text_image

KE8900SR (Front) 6

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE9950 / KE9952 system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

(Optional) Connect the extender's grounding terminal to a suitable grounded object using the grounding wire.
On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE9950T / KE9952T.
Connect the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable provided with this package, and audio cables into the KVM ports on the front of the KE9950T / KE9952T.
Connect the other end of the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B, and audio cables into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE9950T / KE9952T's LAN port.
On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE9950R / KE9952R.
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE9950R / KE9952R's LAN port.
Instead of connecting through the LAN ports, you can choose to connect the KE9950 / KE9952 through the SFP slots. To do so, plug SFP modules into the transmitter and receiver's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*
Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's power jacks, respectively. The KE9952 supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) where power can be supplied through a PoE network switch instead of using a power adapter.
(Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the transmitter and receiver's second power jacks.**
Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G/2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

Available for KE9950T and KE9950R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information. Power redundancy for KE9952T and KE9952R can be achieved with the PoE function.

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE9950T (Rear)"] -->|① Cat 5e/6 cable| B["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    A -->|② DC 5V| C["KE9950T (Rear)"]
    A -->|③ Optical Fiber Cable| D["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    A -->|④ Optical Fiber Cable| E["KE9950T (Rear)"]
    A -->|⑤ Optical Fiber Cable| F["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    A -->|⑥ Optical Fiber Cable| G["KE9950T (Rear)"]
    A -->|⑦ DC 5V| H["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    A -->|⑧ Cat 5e/6 cable| I["KE9950T (Rear)"]

Note: Power adapters are not provided with the KE9952. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to the KE9952.

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

ATEN KE6910 - KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

KE9950T (Front) ③ ④ ⑤

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE9950ATC Point-to-Point Installation

Setting up the KE9950ATC system in a point-to-point configuration is simply a matter of plugging in the cables.

Note: In a point-to-point configuration, no administrator setup is required.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagrams on the next two pages and do the following:

(Optional) Connect the extender's grounding terminal to a suitable grounded object using the grounding wire.
On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE9950T.
Connect the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B cable provided with this package, and audio cables into the KVM ports on the front of the KE9950T.
Connect the other end of the DisplayPort cable, the USB 2.0 Type-A to Type-B, and audio cables into the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 port on the front of the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the secondary KE9950T's LAN port.
On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DisplayPort monitor, serial devices, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE9950R.
Connect the other end of the Cat 5e/6 cable to the KE9950R's LAN port.
Connect the SFP modules into the KE9950T and KE9950R's SFP slots, then connect each end of Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber between the SFP modules.*
Plug the power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the KE9950T and KE9950R's power jacks, respectively.
(Optional) For power redundancy, plug the second power adapters into AC sources with the power cords and plug the other ends into the KE9950T and KE9950R's second power jacks.**

12. Power on the computer.

Note: 1. The SFP module 2A-136G / 2A-137G is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

Available for KE9950T and KE9950R only. The second power adapter with the power cord is sold separately. Contact your ATEN dealer for product information.

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - Power on the computer. - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE9950T (Rear) Primary"] -->|①| B["KE9950T (Rear) Secondary"]
    A -->|②| C["KE9950T (Rear) Primary"]
    A -->|③| D["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    B -->|⑥| E["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    B -->|⑦| F["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    C -->|⑧| G["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    C -->|⑨| H["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    D -->|⑩| I["DC 5V"]
    D -->|⑪| J["DC 5V"]

KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2

KE9950T (Front) Primary & Secondary
ATEN KE6910 - KE9950 / KE9952 Point-to-Point Installation 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

Diagram showing connection between a server tower and ports with labeled pins and connectors

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE6900 / KE6900ST / KE6940 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 419).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off. Refer to the installation diagram on the following page, and do the following:

On the Transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6900T / KE6940T.* Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to indicate itself.
Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM ports on the front of the KE6900T / KE6940T.
Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Use a Cat 5e/6 cable to connect the KE6900T / KE6940T's LAN port to the local area TCP/IP network.
Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE6900T / KE6940T's power jack.
On the receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, DVI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE6900R / KE6940R.**
Use a Cat 5e/6 cable to connect the KE6900R / KE6940R's LAN port to the local area TCP/IP network.
Plug the second power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE6900R / KE6940R's power jack.
Use the OSD on the receiver to configure the network settings for both devices (See Network Configuration, page 151).
Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network.
Power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. If installing the KE6940 with two DVI monitors, connect the second DVI monitor via a DVI cable into the additional ports on the KE6940 and computer. 2. For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 244.

KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6900T"] -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| B["1"]
    A --> C["KE6900R"]
    C -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| D["TCP/IP LAN"]
    D --> E["7"]
    D --> F["8"]
    F --> G["9"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

Note: The diagram above shows KE6900T and KE6900R. The KE6940 installation is the same except that an additional DVI monitor can be connected at each end for a dual-display setup.

KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

ATEN KE6910 - KE6900 / KE6940 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

KE6900T 2 4 USB KVM cable Local PC

Note: The serial port on the transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer, while the serial port on the receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE6900A / KE6940A LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple extender devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 419).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port's network.
For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 244.

Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6900A / KE6940A Point-to-Point Installation on page 86, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network, and then power on the computer(s).

KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900A / KE6940A LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["Optical Fiber Cable"] --> B["KE6900AT (Rear)"]
    B --> C["TCP/IP LAN"]
    C --> D["KE6900AR (Rear)"]
    D --> E["DC 5V"]
    D --> F["Serial Device"]
    D --> G["DC 5V"]
    D --> H["Serial Device"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6900AT (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900A / KE6940A Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT LAN Installation

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port's network.
For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 244.
◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Point-to-Point Installation on page 89, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

Note: If you wish to use CCVSR and/or remote access with WinClient/JavaClient, you will still need to connect the Internet Port of the KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT to an office LAN.

It is highly recommended to mount the AiT unit(s) onto a system rack or wall, and avoid stacked setup to ensure proper ventilation.

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6940AiT (Rear)"] -->|Optical Fiber Cable| B["Office LAN"]
    A -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| C["Office LAN"]
    A --> D["DC 12V"]
    A --> E["DC 12V"]
    A --> F["Serial Device"]
    A --> G["TCP/IP LAN"]
    H["KE6940AR (Rear)"] -->|Optical Fiber Cable| I["Office LAN"]
    H -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| J["TCP/IP LAN"]
    H --> K["DC 5V"]
    H --> L["DC 5V"]
    H --> M["Serial Device"]

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6940AiT (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE6910 / KE6912 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE6910 / KE6912 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 419).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6910 / KE6912 Point-to-Point Installation on page 92, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6910 / KE6912 LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6910T (Rear)"] -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| B["DC 5V"]
    A -->|Optical Fiber Cable| C["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    C -->|Cat 5e/6 cable| D["DC 5V"]
    C -->|Optical Fiber Cable| E["KE6910T (Rear)"]
    E --> F["TCP/IP LAN"]
    E --> G["KE6910R (Rear)"]

KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6910T (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - KE6910 / KE6912 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

Diagram showing connection between a server tower and an audio device via USB, with labeled ports and cable connections.

KE6910ATC LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE6910ATC devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 419).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6910ATC Point-to-Point Installation on page 95, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

KE6910ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6910ATC LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["DC 5V"] --> B["KE6910T Secondary"]
    C["DC 5V"] --> B
    D["DC 5V"] --> E["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    F["DC 5V"] --> E
    G["DC 5V"] --> H["KE6910T Primary"]
    I["DC 5V"] --> J["KE6910T Secondary"]
    K["DC 5V"] --> L["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    M["DC 5V"] --> L
    N["DC 5V"] --> O["KE6910T Secondary"]
    P["DC 5V"] --> O
    Q["DC 5V"] --> R["KE6910T Primary"]
    S["DC 5V"] --> R
    T["DC 5V"] --> U["KE6910T Secondary"]
    V["DC 5V"] --> U
    W["DC 5V"] --> X["KE6910T Secondary"]
    Y["DC 5V"] --> X
    Z["DC 5V"] --> AA["KE6910T Secondary"]
    AB["DC 5V"] --> AA
    AC["DC 5V"] --> AD["KE6910T Secondary"]
    AE["DC 5V"] --> AD
    AF["DC 5V"] --> AG["KE6910T Secondary"]
    AH["DC 5V"] --> AG
    AI["DC 5V"] --> AJ["KE6910T Secondary"]
    AK["DC 5V"] --> AJ
    AL["DC 5V"] --> AM["KE6910T Secondary"]
    AN["DC 5V"] --> AM
    AO["DC 5V"] --> AP["KE6910T Secondary"]
    AQ["DC 5V"] --> AP
    AR["DC 5V"] --> AS["KE6910T Secondary"]
    AT["DC 5V"] --> AS
    AU["DC 5V"] --> AV["KE6910T Secondary"]
    AW["DC 5V"] --> AV
    AX["DC 5V"] --> AY["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    AZ["DC 5V"] --> AY
    BA["DC 5V"] --> BB["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    BC["DC 5V"] --> BB
    BD["DC 5V"] --> BE["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    BF["DC 5V"] --> BE
    BG["DC 5V"] --> BH["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    BI["DC 5V"] --> BH
    BJ["DC 5V"] --> BK["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    BL["DC 5V"] --> BK
    BM["DC 5V"] --> BN["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    BO["DC 5V"] --> BN
    BP["DC 5V"] --> BQ["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    BR["DC 5V"] --> BQ
    BS["DC 5V"] --> BT["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    BU["DC 5V"] --> BT
    BV["DC 5V"] --> BW["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    BX["DC 5V"] --> BW
    BY["DC 5V"] --> BZ["KE6910R (Rear)"]
    CA["DC 5V"] --> BZ
    CB["DC 5V"] --> BD
    CC["DC 5V"] --> BE
    CD["DC 5V"] --> BF
    DD["DC 5V"] --> BX
    DJ["DC 5V"] --> BK
    DK["DC 5V"] --> BX
    BE --> BE
    BF --> BE
    BG --> BF
    BH --> BF
    BI --> BH
    BJ --> BH
    BK --> BH
    LQ["DC 5V"] --> BK

KE6910ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6910T Primary & Secondary (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - KE6910ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

Diagram showing connection between a computer tower and an audio device via USB cable, with labeled ports and connectors.

KE6920 / KE6922 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE6920 / KE6922 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 419).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6920 / KE6922 Point-to-Point Installation on page 98, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note

that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port's network.

The KE6922's LAN port provides Power over Ethernet (PoE) functionality which supplies power to the unit when connected to a compatible PoE network switch.
Power adapters are not provided with KE6922 units. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE6922 units.
For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 244.

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6920 / KE6922 LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6920T (Rear)"] --> B["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    B --> C["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    B --> D["DC 5V"]
    B --> E["Serial Device"]
    B --> F["TCP/IP LAN"]
    B --> G["KE6920R (Rear)"]
    G --> H["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    G --> I["DC 5V"]
    G --> J["Serial Device"]

KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6920T (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - KE6920 / KE6922 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE6920ATC LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE6920ATC devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 419).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off before the installation.

The installation is similar to that of KE6920ATC Point-to-Point Installation on page 101, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note

that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port's network.

For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 244.

KE6920ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE6920ATC LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6920T (Rear) Secondary"] --> B["DC 5V"]
    A --> C["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    A --> D["KE6920T (Rear) Primary"]
    A --> E["TCP/IP LAN"]
    E --> F["KE6920R (Rear)"]
    F --> G["DC 5V"]
    F --> H["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    F --> I["Serial Device"]
    F --> J["DC 5V"]
    F --> K["Serial Device"]
    F --> L["DC 5V"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

KE6920ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE6920T Primary & Secondary (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - KE6920ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

ATEN USB DVI-D KVM cable

KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE8950 / KE8952 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 419).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off.

Refer to the installation diagram on the following page, and do the following:

On the transmitter side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor, microphone and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE8950T / KE8952T. Each port is marked with an appropriate icon to indicate itself.
Connect the USB KVM cable provided to the KVM ports on the front of the KE8950T / KE8952T.
Connect the other end of the USB KVM cable to the keyboard, video, mouse, speaker, and microphone ports on the computer.
For control of serial devices, connect the RS-232 serial port on the Transmitter to a serial port on the computer.
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the LAN port, or a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable to the SFP port* to connect the KE8950T / KE8952T to the local area TCP/IP network.**
Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE8950T / KE8952T's power jack.***
On the Receiver side, plug the mouse, keyboard, HDMI monitor, microphone, and speakers into the ports on the console section of the KE8950R / KE8952R.****
Connect a Cat 5e/6 cable to the LAN port, or a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) optical fiber cable to the SFP port* to connect the KE8950R / KE8952R to the local area TCP/IP network.**
Plug the power adapter into an AC source, and plug the other end into the KE8950R / KE8952R's power jack.***
Use the OSD on the receiver to configure the network settings for both devices (See Network Configuration, page 151).
Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network.
Power on the computer(s).

Note: 1. The unit supports network redundancy. Where both LAN and SFP ports are connected, a network redundancy is established. Please note, though, that if you use copper SFP modules, the module has to be removed for the unit to switch to the LAN port's network.
2. The KE8952's LAN port provides Power over Ethernet (PoE) functionality which supplies power to the unit when connected to a compatible PoE network switch.
3. Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE8952 units.
4. For USB keyboards / mice with advanced function designs, see USB Mode, page 244.

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE8950T (Rear)"] -->|Cat 5e/6 Cable| B["AT&T"]
    A -->|Optical Fiber Cable| C["AT&T"]
    D["KE8950R (Rear)"] -->|Cat 5e/6 Cable Opti Fiber Cable| E["AT&T"]
    D --> F["AT&T"]
    G["TCP/IP LAN"] --> C
    H["DC 5V"] --> D
    I["DC 5V"] --> J["PC"]
    K["7"] --> L["Computer"]

Note: Power adapters are not provided with KE8952 units. Please contact your ATEN dealer to purchase additional power adapters, or use the Power over Ethernet (PoE) feature to supply power to KE8952 units.

KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

ATEN KE6910 - KE8950 / KE8952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

KE8950T (Front) 2 4 USB HDMI KVM Cable Local PC

Note: The serial port on the Transmitter (shown above) connects to the computer; the serial port on the Receiver (not shown) connects to a serial device (optional).

KE9950 / KE9952 LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE9950 / KE9952 devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 419).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off.

The installation is similar to that of KE6900 / KE6940 Point-to-Point Installation on page 83, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE9950 / KE9952 LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE9950T (Rear)"] -->|DC 5V| B["Cat 5e/6 cable"]
    A -->|TCP/IP LAN| C["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    B -->|DC 5V| D["Optical Fiber Cable"]
    C -->|TCP/IP LAN| E["Optical Fiber Cable"]

KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE9950T (Front)
ATEN KE6910 - KE9950 / KE9952 Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

Diagram showing connection between a computer tower and an electronic device with labeled ports and connectors

KE9950ATC LAN Installation

Setting up the units on a network allows point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, and multipoint-to-multipoint computer to console operation by connecting multiple KE9950ATC devices on the same TCP/IP LAN. Prior to the setup, we recommend laying out the plans for your KE installation using our performance guide (see Keys to Network Performance, page 419).

A few points to note during your setup:

The units are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
In a network setup with multiple units, each Transmitter and Receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between KE Series devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE devices, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.
◆ Make sure that all equipment is powered off.

The installation is similar to that of KE9950ATC Point-to-Point Installation on page 116, with the difference in connecting the transmitter and the receiver to a local area TCP/IP network. Refer to the diagrams on the following page and connect accordingly.

Repeat these steps for each Transmitter and Receiver you wish to install on the network then power on the computer(s).

KE9950ATC Network Installation Diagram 1 of 2
ATEN KE6910 - KE9950ATC LAN Installation - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["Cat 5e/6 cable"] --> B["KE9950T Secondary"]
    C["Optical Fiber Cable"] --> B
    D["Cat 5e/6 cable"] --> E["KE9950T Primary"]
    F["Optical Fiber Cable"] --> E
    G["TCP/IP LAN"] --> H["KE9950R (Rear)"]
    I["TCP/IP LAN"] --> H
    J["DC 5V"] --> K["Computer"]
    L["DC 5V"] --> M["Computer"]
    N["DC 5V"] --> O["Computer"]
    P["DC 5V"] --> Q["Computer"]
    R["DC 5V"] --> S["Computer"]
    T["DC 5V"] --> U["Computer"]
    V["DC 5V"] --> W["Computer"]
    X["DC 5V"] --> Y["Computer"]
    Z["DC 5V"] --> AA["Computer"]

KE9950ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2

KE9950T (Front) Primary & Secondary
ATEN KE6910 - KE9950ATC Network Installation Diagram 2 of 2 - 1

text_image

Diagram showing connection between a server tower and ports with labeled connectors and ports

Network Configuration

This section provides instructions to configure the network settings with a fixed IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. To use the IP Installer to configure the IP address, see IP Installer, page 406.

Note: 1. Both devices are preconfigured with factory-default network settings. If you install only one set of KE Series units, you do not need to change these default network settings. See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for further details.
2. In a network setup with multiple units, each transmitter and receiver must be configured with a unique IP address. See Network Configuration, page 151, for further details.
3. We recommend using 1000-Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (wire speeds, non-blocking with 1 Gbps / 1.5 Mpps performance per port) between devices installed on different LAN segments. 10/100 Mbps switches might cause poor performance.
4. In multipoint configurations, the IGMP and flow control function of your network switches/hubs must be enabled to avoid the deterioration of data throughput. To ensure functionality use a layer 3 switch that supports IGMP queries.
5. If your network uses cascaded switches, please check to ensure the data throughput is sufficient.
6. To get the best performance, we suggest creating a private network for KE device, as they are bandwidth-intensive devices.

To configure the network settings, do the following:

Set up the hardware and connect the transmitter and receiver to the local area network (see KE6900 / KE6940 LAN Installation, page 119, or KE8950 / KE8952 LAN Installation, page 141).
From the receiver, tap [Scroll Lock] twice to invoke the OSD.
Select the Receiver or Transmitter from the sidebar menu.
Enter the password and click Configure.

The default password is: password.

From the Network tab, select Set IP address manually and enter the following:

- IP Address — sets the IP address for the KE device. Key in a valid unique IP address.

Note: See Default IP Addresses, page 152, for the preconfigured factory-default settings.

- Subnet Mask — sets the subnet mask for the KE device. Key in a valid subnet mask value.

Note: The default setting is 255.255.255.0

- Default Gateway — sets the default gateway for the KE device. Key in a valid default gateway.

6. Click Save.

Exit OSD

To exit the OSD, press [Esc] on the keyboard, click Logout; tap [Scroll Lock] twice, or return to the OSD main page and press the front panel OSD pushbutton (receiver only).

At this point, the receiver can connect to the transmitter to access the remote computer (see OSD Matrix Mode, page 178 for instructions).

Default IP Addresses

The preconfigured factory-default IP addresses for the KE Series devices are as follows:

Transmitters - 192.168.0.61

Receivers-192.168.0.60

Note: For KE89 and KE99 Series devices, only use factory-default IP address if the DHCP is not present or if the initial configuration is done in PTP mode because DHCP is supported.

KE ATC Series Bundle Hotkey

This bundle hotkey allows you to fast switch to any KE ATC Series transmitter units in your network environment using the keyboard connected to the receiver unit. These hotkeys are pre-configured to correspond to the IP address you have configured in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page, see Properties, page 162. To fast switch to a transmitter unit, simply press the hotkey listed below.

Hotkey Rule Example (Tx IP)
Ctrl + F1 Correspond to the Tx IP address in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.61(Transmiiter's default IP address)
Ctrl + F2 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 1 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.62
Ctrl + F3 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 2 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.63
Ctrl + F4 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 3 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.64
Ctrl + F5 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 4 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.65
Ctrl + F6 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 5 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.66
Ctrl + F7 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 6in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.67
Ctrl + F8 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 7 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.68
Ctrl + F9 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 8 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.69
Ctrl + F10 Correspond to the Tx IP address + 9 in the KE OSD Receiver Properties page.		192.168.0.70

For example, to fast switch KE ATC Series transmitters via IP addresses 192.168.2.1 and 192.168.2.2, follow the steps below.

From the KE OSD, go to the Receiver Properties page, see Properties, page 162.
Key in IP address 192.168.2.1 in the Properties field as illustrated below, and click Save.

ATEN KE6910 - KE ATC Series Bundle Hotkey - 1

text_image

Network Properties System Mode Extender Matrix RS232 Settings Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Properties Transmitter Video IP 192.168.21 Transmitter Audio IP 192.168.21 Transmitter USB IP 192.168.21 Transmitter RS232 IP 192.168.21 Enable Media Video Audio USB RS232 Manager Address Manager IP Manager Part S110 Beeper Enable USB Mode Virtual Media Generic USB device Touch Screen Calibration Enception Enable User Station Keyboard Keyboard County Code English (US) Video Quality Graphics mode Video mode Save

From your keyboard connected to the receiver unit, press Ctrl + F1 and Ctrl + F2 to switch between the two connected transmitter units.

KE I/O Ports

The following table provides the I/O port use of KE Series devices.

Device Port Number
KVM over IP Matrix Manager (TCP)	HTTP 8080
	HTTPS 8443
	Device TCP 9110
	CLI9111
	Redundancy 9120
	Database Service 1527
KVM over IP Matrix Manager (UDP)	Port 9110
KVM over IP Matrix Manager (UDP)	Broadcast 9000
KE TX/RX Device (TCP) Manager 9110




KE TX Device (TCP)	VM	9001
	vUSB	9002
	Serial	9003
	USB Access Mode	9009
KE RX Device (TCP)	CLI	9130
KE TX/RX Device (UDP)	Manager 9110
	Service 9000
	Array Mode	9120
	Video	0xFE00(65024) - 0xFE03(65027)
	Audio	0xFE04(65028) - 0xFE05(65029)

LED Display

Both the Transmitter and Receiver have front panel LEDs to indicate their operating and power status, as explained in the table below:

LED Indication
LAN This LED indicates the network status.	Lights when connected to the LAN and blinks when the Ethernet connection is active:Orange: 10 MbpsOrange + Green: 100 MbpsGreen: 1000 MbpsOff when not connected to the LAN.
Power	Lights blue when the unit is powered on.OFF when power is off.
Local	Lights green to Indicate the Transmitter has KVM focus of the computer
Remote	Lights green to Indicate the Receiver has KVM focus of the computer.

Overview

This chapter provides instructions to configure and operate KE Series devices using the local On Screen Display (OSD). To configure the network settings with the OSD, see Network Configuration, page 151.

Invoking the OSD

The On Screen Display (OSD) is a keyboard/mouse-driven application on the receiver used to configure the transmitter and receiver settings. Once the receiver has discovered the transmitter over a network* or Ethernet cable connection, you can use the OSD on the receiver to configure the transmitter.

To invoke the OSD, press the OSD pushbutton on the front of the receiver, or from the keyboard tap the Scroll Lock key twice. The OSD main page will appear (see Press the Esc key to cancel., page 159).

To exit the OSD, press [Esc] on the keyboard; click Logout; tap the Scroll Lock key twice; or return to the OSD main page and press the OSD pushbutton on the front of the receiver. The OSD disappears and the computer desktop screen or the System Login prompt is displayed.

Note: 1. For the Receiver to discover the Transmitter over a network, both must be on the same subnet of the LAN.
2. To change the OSD hotkeys, see page 177.
3. If the keyboard/mouse won't work when the OSD is invoked, see USB Mode, page 244.

Touch Screen Calibration

If you're using a touch screen monitor and the OSD appears off center, you can use the blinking + at each corner to adjust the position of the OSD.

OSD Hotkeys

The OSD hotkeys navigate the Receiver's OSD screens. The hotkeys work after logging in from the System Login screen (see page 178) but not the OSD Configuration screen. Pressing a hotkey will immediately take you to the corresponding OSD screen.

Hotkey OSD Screen Page
[F1] Connections Page 1 in List Mode 179
[F2] Connections Page 1 in Array Mode 182
[F3] Profile Page 1 184
[F5] Push Content Page 1 185
[F6] Pull Content Page 1 187
[F7]	Receiver > Properties	162
[F8]	User Preferences	177
[F9]	OSD Login Screen (logs user off)	178

Users can also use the [Page Up] and [Page Down] keys to jump to the previous and next configuration pages.

Non-OSD Hotkeys

The following are the hotkeys that can be used without entering the OSD screen:

Reverting to Previous

Users can use the [Alt] + [K] hotkey to switch back to the transmitter channel previously accessed.

Note: For KE6900 / KE8950 / KE9950, [Alt] + [K] is not supported, but the same operation can be achieved by pressing [K] under Hotkey Mode.

Hotkey Mode

The Hotkey Mode allows users to quickly switch from one transmitter to another. Either press [Num Lock] + [-] or [Ctrl] + [F12] to enter Hotkey Mode.

Once in Hotkey Mode, you can use the [Next Arrow] and [Previous Arrow] keys to quickly switch between different transmitters. You can also press a

[Number Key] + [S] / [O] / [E] / [V] to access a transmitter based on its order number in Favorites (see page 180) by Share / Occupy / Exclusive / View Only mode.

Microphone Hotkey

You can switch microphone access between Receivers with a hotkey:

Press and hold down [Num Lock].
Press and release [-].
Release [Num Lock].
Press 1.

Press the Esc key to cancel.

OSD Interface

After you invoke the OSD, the main page appears:

ATEN KE6910 - OSD Interface - 1

text_image

KE O8D Receiver Transmitter User Preferences About Logout Password Configure Back to Connection ATEN << Select Config Type and Key in Password

Note: A password is required to enter the OSD. The default password is: password. For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change the password.

The OSD components are described in the table below:

No.	Item Description
1	Receiver Select this radio button, enter a password, and click Configure to enter the Receiver Configuration screen.
2	Transmitter Select this radio button, enter a password, and click Configure to enter the Transmitter Configuration screen.Note: Receiver must first discover the transmitter over the network for this option to be available.
3	User Preferences Select this radio button, enter a password, and click Configure to enter the User Preferences screen.
4	About About provides information regarding the OSD version.
5	Password Input the OSD password and click Configure to enter the selected configuration screen. See note for password.
6	Configure	After entering a password, click Configure to enter the selected configuration screen.
7	B a c k Connection	Clicking this button exits the OSD and returns you to the computer's video display.

Logging in for the First Time

If you are the administrator, and are logging in for the first time (Receiver or User Preference radio button), use the default password (password).

For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change the login password immediately as shown below:

ATEN KE6910 - Logging in for the First Time - 1

text_image

Password User Password Change For your safety, you have to change login password right away. OK

Click OK and change the password in the dialog box shown below:

ATEN KE6910 - Logging in for the First Time - 2

text_image

Password User Password Change New Password Confirm Password Cancel Save

Enter the password and confirm it in the next field. The password must be different from your original password.

Receiver Configuration

Select the Receiver radio button and click Configure to login, the Network tab appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Receiver Configuration - 1

text_image

KE DSD Network Properties System IP Installer Enable View Only Disabled Network Configuration Obtain IP address automatically Set IP address manually IP Address 192.168.0.71 Submit Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 192.168.0.254 Password Configure Back to Connection Save

Network

The Network tab allows you to configure the Receiver's IP address settings:

Item Description
IP Installer The IP	Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning an IP address to the device. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enable, View Only, or Disable for the IP Installer utility. See IP Installer, page 406 for instructions.Note: For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only or Disable after each use.
Network Configuration	For dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP), select the Obtain IP address automatically radio button.To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway select the Set IP address manually radio button and fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.For help configuring network settings with the OSD, see Network Configuration, page 151.

After entering the information, click Save.

Properties

There are two versions of Properties for KE Series, a Regular Version, and a Slim Version.

The Properties tab allows you to configure the Receiver's settings.

Note: KE8900ST, KE8900SR, and KE9900ST are Slim Version.

Regular Version
ATEN KE6910 - Properties - 1

text_image

KE OBD Network Properties System ATEN Receiver Transmits User Preferences About Login Mode Extender Matrix RS232 Settings Baud Rate 9500 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Properties Transmitter Video IP 192.168.0.62 Transmitter Audio IP 192.168.0.62 Transmitter USB IP 192.168.0.62 Transmitter RS232 IP 192.168.0.62 Enable Media Video Audio USB RS232 Manager Address Manager IP 192.168.0.12 Manager Port 9110 Recover Enable USB Mode Virtual Media Generic USB device Encryption Enable Touch Screen Calibration Calibrate Receiver Keyboard Keyboard County Code English (US) Disable Front Video Button Disabled Password Configure Save

Item Description
Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver's OSD menu.Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from the KVM over IP Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 199).
Properties	If you selected Extender mode (above) set the Transmitter IP address for the Receiver's Video, Audio, USB, and RS232 source signals.If you selected Matrix mode (above) the Properties will be grayed out. Use Channels to configure the Transmitter connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 199).
RS232 Settings C	Configure the serial device settings for the Receiver. The default settings are: Baud Rate: 9600 Parity: None Data Bits: 8 bits Stop bits: 1 bit Flow Control: None
Enable Media Select which type of media the Receiver can stream from Transmitters: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232. For KE8950 Series models, use the radio button to set the source of the audio signal: HDMI, Analog, or Both.
Manager Address	Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The default port number is 9110.
Beeper Check this	box to allow the Receiver to beep when configuration changes are made to it.
Touch Screen Calibration	Use this button to calibrate the surface of a USB touch screen connected to the unit. When the calibration screen appears, touch the flashing + symbol at each corner until the process is complete.
USB Mode Select	the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB flash drive into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data transfer speeds but cannot work with other USB devices. When Receivers mount or unmount USB flash drives, the keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay. Each Transmitter and Receiver can respectively support up to 12 and 3 virtual media connections at the same time (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters only support up to 3 virtual media connections.vUSB (generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB peripherals into the USB ports. KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB (generic USB device) mode. In this mode, KE6900T / KE6940T and all Receivers support up to 2 USB connections, and all Transmitters support up to 5 USB connections (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: The vUSB option also allows a keyboard and mouse with special functions to be plugged into the USB ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and mouse must be plugged into the console ports.Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB drives plugged into the USB ports.
Receiver Keyboard	Use the Keyboard Country Code drop-down menu to select the Receiver's language keyboard for use in the OSD.
Disable front video button	You can enable or disable the function (select video mode or graphic mode) of the video pushbutton on the front of the receiver.Check Disable to disable.Uncheck Disable to enable.

After entering the information, click Save.

Slim Version

ATEN KE6910 - Slim Version - 1

text_image

Network Properties System Mode Extender Monix RS232 Settings Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Properties Transmitter Video IP 192.168.0.61 Transmitter Audio IP 192.168.0.61 Transmitter USB IP 192.168.0.61 Transmitter RS232 IP 192.168.0.61 Enable Media ✓ Video ✓ Audio ✓ USB ✓ RS232 Manager Address Manager IP Manager Post 9110 Beeper ✓ Enable USB Mode ✓ Virtual Media ✓ Generic USB device Encryption ✓ Enable Touch Screen Calibration Calibrate User Station Keyboard Keyboard County Code English (US) Video Quality Graphics modes Video mode Save

Item Description
Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver's OSD menu.Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from the KVM over IP Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 199).
Properties	If you selected Extender mode (above) set the Transmitter IP address for the Receiver's Video, Audio, USB, and RS232 source signals.If you selected Matrix mode (above) the Properties will be grayed out. Use Channels to configure the Transmitter connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 199).
RS232 Settings Configure the serial device settings for the Receiver. The default settings are:Baud Rate: 9600Parity: NoneData Bits: 8 bitsStop bits: 1 bitFlow Control: None
Enable Media Select which type of media the Receiver can stream from Transmitters: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232. For KE8950 Series models, use the radio button to set the source of the audio signal: HDMI, Analog, or Both.
Manager Address	Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The default port number is 9110.
Beeper Check this	box to allow the Receiver to beep when configuration changes are made to it.
Touch Screen Calibration	Use this button to calibrate the surface of a USB touch screen connected to the unit. When the calibration screen appears, touch the flashing + symbol at each corner until the process is complete.
USB Mode Select	the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB flash drive into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data transfer speeds but cannot work with other USB devices. When Receivers mount or unmount USB flash drives, the keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay. Each Transmitter and Receiver can respectively support up to 12 and 3 virtual media connections at the same time (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters only support up to 3 virtual media connections.vUSB (generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB peripherals into the USB ports. KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB (generic USB device) mode. In this mode, KE6900T / KE6940T and all Receivers support up to 2 USB connections, and all Transmitters support up to 5 USB connections (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: The vUSB option also allows a keyboard and mouse with special functions to be plugged into the USB ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and mouse must be plugged into the console ports.Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB drives plugged into the USB ports.
Receiver Keyboard	Use the Keyboard Country Code drop-down menu to select the Receiver's language keyboard for use in the OSD.
Video Quality (KE8900ST / 8900SR / 9900ST)	You can select video mode or graphic mode for the video quality, the Slim Version KE Series does not have a phsycial pushbutton on the front of the receiver.

After entering the information, click Save.

System

The System tab allows you to configure the Receiver's general settings:

ATEN KE6910 - System - 1

text_image

Network Properties System Device Information Name KE6940R Description IP Address 192.168.0.60 MAC Address 00:10.74:a0:01:37 F/W Version V1.1.106 (May 2 2014 13:39:47) Serial Number Reboot Reset to factory default Reboot User Station Password Change Enable Old Password ********** New Password ********** Confirm Password ********** Save

Item Description
Device Information	Enter the Name, and Description of the Receiver. It also displays the IP Address, MAC Address, F/W Version, and Serial Number of the Receiver.
Reboot	Check the box and click Reboot to reset the Receiver's settings back to the factory default. All custom settings (but not the login information) will be lost.
Receiver Password Change	Check Enable to require a password for access to the Receiver's OSD configuration screen. Enter the Old Password, enter a New Password, and confirm the new password in the Confirm Password box.

After entering the information, click Save.

Transmitter Configuration

When you select the Transmitter radio button and click Configure to login, the Network tab appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Transmitter Configuration - 1

text_image

KE QSD Network Properties System Internet Port ATEN Receiver Transmitter User Preferences About Password Configure IP Installer Enable View Only Disabled Network Configuration Obtain IP address automatically Set IP address manually IP Address 192.168.0.61 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway Save

Network

The Network tab allows you to configure the Transmitter's IP address settings:

Item Description
IP Installer The IP	Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning an IP address to the device. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enable, View Only, or Disable for the IP Installer utility. See IP Installer, page 406 for instructions.Note: For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only or Disable after each use.
Network Configuration	For dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP), select the Obtain IP address automatically radio button.To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway select the Set IP address manually radio button and fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.For help configuring network settings with the OSD, see Network Configuration, page 151.

After entering the information, click Save.

Properties

The Properties tab allows you to configure the Transmitter's extender settings:

ATEN KE6910 - Properties - 1

text_image

Network Properties System Internet Port Mode Properties ● Extender ○ Matrix RS232 Settings Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Manager Address Manager IP 192.168.0.12 Manager Port 9110 Transmitter Video Setting Video Type 1: DVI-D + 2: DVI-D Video Quality 5 Color Depth 24 bits Background Refresh Every 32 frames Bandwidth Limit Unlimited Beeper ✓ Enable Save

Item Description
Mode Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to Receiver) setups that are managed with the Receiver's OSD menu.Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections from the KVM over IP Matrix Manager web GUI. This mode is for advanced administration of Transmitter to Receiver connections (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 199).
Item Description
Properties	Port OS: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating system of the computer connected to the Transmitter.OS Language: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating system language of the computer connected to the Transmitter.Enable Multicast Video: Check this box to allow a broadcast of the Transmitter's video signal to be sent out to multiple Receivers.Enable Multicast Audio: Check this box to allow a broadcast of the Transmitter's audio signal to be sent out to multiple Receivers.EDID Mode Selection: EDID contains a display's basic information and is used by the source device to utilize the best resolution across different monitors. When Manual or Remix is selected, the Receiver's OSD will have a button allowing the local EDID setting to be configured for the connection. Select how you want the source device to acquire the display's EDID:Default: EDID is set to the default ATEN configuration. This setting must be used when connecting KE6900 devices to KE8950 devices.Auto: Checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays.Manual: Manually set the EDID configuration from the Connections Page (see page 179).Remix: Manually checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays (see page 179).
Enable Media	Select which type of media the Transmitter can stream to Receivers: Video, Audio, USB, and RS232.
RS232 Settings C	Configure the serial device settings for the Transmitter. The default settings are:Baud Rate: 9600Parity: NoneData Bits: 8 bitsStop bits: 1 bitFlow Control: None
Manager Address	Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The default port number is 9110.
TransmitterVideo Attributes	To set the Transmitter's video settings:Video Type: Select the DVI video connector being used by the display: Digital (DVI-D) or Digital (DVI-I). This option is available for KE6900, KE6940, KE6900A, KE6940A units and will be grayed out for other models.Color Depth: Select the number of bits to use for the color depth: 24, 16, or 8. This is the number of bits used to describe the color of a single pixel. A bit depth determines the number of colors that can be displayed at one time.Bandwidth Limit: Select the maximum bandwidth that the Transmitter can use to transmit video over the network. A lower bandwidth setting transmits lower quality video; a higher bandwidth setting sends higher quality video but this can affect network speed.Video Quality: Select the video quality to use. 5 is the highest video quality, and 1 is the lowest video quality. Options are: 1~5.Background Refresh: Sets how often the Transmitter refreshes the background image on the connected display. Options are to refresh every 256,128, 64, 32,16, or 0 frames.
Beeper Check this	box to allow the device to beep every time a configuration change is made.
Occupy Timeout S	Set a time threshold for devices whose Access Mode has been set to Occupy (see Access Type, page 239). If there is no activity from the Receiver occupying the port for the amount of time set here, the Receiver is timed out and the port is released. The first Receiver to send keyboard or mouse input after the port has been released gets to occupy the port. Input a value from 1 to 240 seconds.

After entering the information, click Save.

System

The System tab allows you to configure the Transmitter's general settings:

ATEN KE6910 - System - 1

text_image

Network Properties System Internet Port Device Information Name KE6940AIT Description | IP Address 192.168.0.61 MAC Address 00:10:74:d1:80:12 F/W Version V1.5.143 (May 14 2020 15:32:39) MFG A1H90430032 Reboot Reset to factory default Reboot Transmitter Password Change Enable Old Password xxxxxxxxx New Password xxxxxxxxx Confirm Password xxxxxxxxx Save

Item Description
Device Information	Enter the Name and Description of the Transmitter. It also displays the IP Address, MAC Address, F/W Version, and Serial Number of the Transmitter.
Reboot	Check the box and click Reboot to reset the Transmitter's settings back to the factory default. All custom settings (but not the login information) will be lost.
Transmitter Password Change	Check Enable to require a password for access to the Transmitter's OSD configuration screen. Enter the Old Password, enter a New Password, and confirm the new password in the Confirm Password box.

After entering the information, click Save.

Internet Port (AiT Models only)

The Internet Port tab allows you to configure the Transmitter's Internet Port settings:

ATEN KE6910 - Internet Port (AiT Models only) - 1

text_image

Network Properties System Internet Port IP Installer Enable View Only Disabled Previous Page Next Page Service Port Program Port 9000 HTTP Port 90 HTTPS Port 443 IPv4 Settings DHCP Manual IP Address Submit Mask Default Gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Set DNS server address manually Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server IPv6 Settings DHCP Manual IP Address Submit Prefix Length 0 Default Gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Set DNS server address manually Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server Save

ATEN KE6910 - Internet Port (AiT Models only) - 2

text_image

Network Properties System Internet Port Previous Page Next Page CCVSR Disabled Enable MAC Address e0.05.0c 00.00.06 Service Port 0 Working Mode Enable ICMP Disable Browser Service Disable HTTPS(SSL) Enable Client AP Device List Save

IP Installer

The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning IP addresses to the transmitter. Click one of the radio buttons to select Enabled, Disabled, or View Only for the IP Installer utility. See p. 406 for IP Installer details.

Note: 1. If you select View Only, you will be able to see the transmitter in the IP Installer's Device List, but you will not be able to change the IP address.
2. For security, we strongly recommend that you set this to View Only or Disabled after using it.

Service Ports

Specify the ports that the transmitter uses for various network services.

Program: This is the port number for connecting to the transmitter from the Windows Client and Java Viewers, and from the Windows and Java Client AP programs. The default is 9000.
HTTP: The port number for a browser login. The default is 80.
HTTPS: The port number for a secure browser login. The default is 443.

Note: 1. Valid entries for all of the Service Ports are from 1–65535.

The service ports cannot have the same value. You must set a different value for each one.
If there is no firewall (on an intranet, for example), it does not matter what these numbers are set to, since they have no effect.

If a firewall is being used, the Administrator can specify the port numbers that the firewall will allow (and set the firewall accordingly). If a port other than the default is set, users must specify the port number as part of the IP address when they log in. If not, an invalid port number (or no port number) is specified, the transmitter will not be found.

IPv4 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IP address assigned dynamically at boot-up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IP address.

- For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This is the default setting.)

- To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the IP address.

Note: 1. If you choose DHCP, when the transmitter starts up it waits to get its IP address from the DHCP server. If it has not obtained the address after one minute, it automatically reverts to its factory default IP address, 192.168.0.61.
2. If the transmitter is on a network that uses DHCP to assign network addresses, and you need to ascertain its IP address, you can use the IP installer. See IP Installer, page 406 for information.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically, or a fixed address can be specified.

For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.
To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

IPv6 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IPv6 address assigned dynamically at boot-up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IPv6 address.

For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This is the default setting.)
To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the IP address.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically, or a fixed address can be specified.

For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.
To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

CCVSR

Important operations occur on the transmitter can be recorded using the CCVSR program.

Check Enable to enable the CCVSR function and specify the MAC address and the Service Port of the computer the CCVSR runs on.

Note: The valid port range is 1–65535. The port number must differ than the one used for the Program port (see Service Ports, page 174).

Working Mode

Use this section to set the working mode parameters.

Enable ICMP: Check to enable ICMP service.
Disable Browser Service: Check to disable a particular access. Available options are: browser, http or https.
Enable Client AP Device List: Check to enable this function. When enabled, the unit will be discoverable in the Server List when using the WinClient or Java Client AP (see Starting Up on page 311). Disabling this function will render the unit undiscoverable in the Server List but can still be connected to.

After entering the information, click Save.

User Preferences

When you select the User Preferences radio button and click Configure to login, the configuration screen appears:

ATEN KE6910 - User Preferences - 1

text_image

KE OSD ATEN Receiver Transmitter User Preferences About Logout Password Configure Back to Connection User Password Change Old Password New Password Confirm Password ODD Settings OSD Language English OSD Hockey [clr][ctrl] Logout Timeout 30 min (0-180) Disabled Screen Blanker 0 min (0-30) Disabled Save

Item Description
User Password Change	This section allows you to change the OSD password:1. Key in the old password in the Old password field.2. Key in the new password in the New password field.3. Key in the new password again in the Confirm password field.
OSD Language Click the drop-down menu to select the language you want to use for OSD sessions. Choices are: English, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Japanese, Korean, Dutch, French, Spanish, Portuguese, and Russian.
OSD Hotkey Select the hotkey combination to invoke the OSD screen.
Logout Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time set with this function, the user is automatically logged out of the OSD. A login is necessary before the OSD can be accessed again.
Screen Blanker Set how many minutes the OSD waits when a session is idle before turning off the display.

When you have made your choices, Click Save.

OSD Matrix Mode

If you set the system to Matrix mode (in Properties), you will see the System Login screen when you enter the invoke the OSD, which provides access to the Connection Page by entering a username and password:

ATEN KE6910 - OSD Matrix Mode - 1

text_image

KE OSD ATEN KE690R71 Login Username Password Login OSD Configuration Go to Configuration Window

Note: 4. If the Receiver does not require a login, click Login to system (see Login Required, under Basic, page 224). For information about Extender and Desktop/Matrix modes, see Mode, page 162.

After you login the Connection Page appears, as shown on the next page.

Connections Page

List Mode

ATEN KE6910 - List Mode - 1

text_image

KE OSD Administrator, Welcome to KEOSD 70 Connection Page 1 Profile Page 1 Push Content Page 1 Full Content Page 1 Channel Name Channel Status Connect KE69T62 [VAUS]DeBuGE18cRoSs Exclusive Occupy Share View Only Ext KE69T65 [VAUS]DeBuGE18cRoSs Exclusive Occupy Share View Only Ext KE89E0T [VAUS]DeBuGE18cRoSs Exclusive Occupy Share View Only Ext KE6940AIT [VAUS] Exclusive Occupy Share View Only Ext I<< << >> >>1 Favorites Array Mode Logout Go to Configuration Window

The Connection Page components are described in the table below:

No.	Item Description
1	Channel Name Lists the Channel connections available for the Receiver. A Channel is a defined connection to Transmitters, created in the Device Management tab of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager (see Browser / Telnet Operation, page 199).
2	Channel Status This field provides thestatus information of the Channel, including the device name of the receiver(s) currently accessing and its operation mode.Operation modes are abbreviated as S, O, E and E for Share, Occupy, Exclusive and View Only, respectively.
3	Search Search for transmitters based on the keyword(s) entered.
4	Connect To connect the Receiver to a Channel, click the access type:Exclusive: The first Receiver to access the Channel has exclusive control over the Channel. No other Receivers can view the Channel. The Timeout function does not apply to this setting.Occupy: The first Receiver to access the Channel has control over the Channel. However, additional Receivers may view the Channel's video display. If the Receiver controlling the Channel is inactive for longer than the time set in the Timeout box, control is transferred to the first Receiver to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.Share: Can simultaneously share control over the Channel. Input from the Receivers is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.View Only: Receiver connects with view only access to the Channels video display.
5	Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next pageor to the end of the list if there are more Channels available than can be seen on the page.
6	Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous page or to the beginning of the list if there are more Channels available than can be seen on the page.
7	Favorites Click Favorites to list only the Channels marked as favorites. Channels marked as favorites appear with a heart icon.To add/remove a Favorite, select a Channel and then right click with the mouse to select Add to Favorite or Remove from Favorite.Note: A maximum of 50 channels can be marked as Favorites.
8	Array Mode Click to view the Channel connections with a video preview of each source. The list will be shown in groups of six at a time. The Array Mode is discussed on page 182.
9	List Mode This option appears after selecting Array mode.Click to view the Channel connections in a list that can be sorted by name or with favorites listed first.Click the Channel Name heading to change the sort.
10	EDID Mode When a Transmitter's EDID is configured, depending on its setting, different buttons will or won't appear to configure the Receiver's EDID for the connection. The following rules apply to the Receiver's OSD according to the Transmitter's EDID setting:Under Default or Auto EDID mode, no EDID button appears as there is nothing to configure.Under Manual or Remix EDID mode, the EDID button appears allowing you to select Manual EDID or Remix EDID.Note: For KE9950 / KE9952 / KE8950 / KE8952, when set to Manual EDID mode with a resolution of 2560 x 1440 @ 60 Hz, make sure to enable Reduced Blanking Mode, otherwise it must be adjusted to 2560 x 1440 @ 30 Hz.Click Manual or Remix to adjust the EDID setting locally.To set the Transmitter's EDID Mode, see Properties, page 170.
11	Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
12	Go to Configuration Window	Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

Array Mode

Note that Array Mode is not supported by slim KVM over IP Receivers.

In Array Mode the screen is divided into a grid of panels, with each panel showing the video display of a particular Channel. Right-click a panel and select a mode to connect: E: Exclusive, O: Occupy, S: Share, V: View Only, X: Exit. While the mouse cursor hovers over a panel displaying video, if audio is being sent from that Transmitter, it can be heard at the Receiver.

ATEN KE6910 - Array Mode - 1

text_image

GroupTX K<< >> >>1 2/2 3/3 4/4 5/5 6/8 Favorites List mode Logout Conligure

No.	Item Description
	1 Next Arrow Use these two	buttons to navigate to the next page or to the end of the list if there are more Channels available than can be seen on the page.
	2 Previous Arrow Use these	two buttons to navigate to the previous page or to the beginning of the list if there are more Channels available than can be seen on the page.
	3 Grid Selection Select a range for how many Channels you want to display. Options are: 2x2, 3x3, 4x4, 5x5, and 6x6.
4	Favorites Click Favorites	to list only the Channels marked as favorites. Click All to list all Channels.To add/remove a Favorite, go to List Mode, select a Channel and then right click with the mouse to select Add to Favorite or Remove from Favorite.Note: A maximum of 50 channels can be marked as Favorites.
5	List Mode Click to view the	Channel connections in a list that can be sorted by name or with favorites listed first. Click the Channel Name heading to change the sort. List Mode is discussed on page 180.
6	Logout Click this button to	log out of the Connection Page.
10	Configure Click this button	to return to the main OSD screen.

Profile Page

Click the Profile Page tab and the following screen appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Profile Page - 1

text_image

KE OSD ATEN Administrator, Welcome to KE. Connection Page 1 Profile Page 1 Push Content Page 1 Pull Content Page 1 Name Description Connect 1 Connect Disconnect 2 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Spread Page 1 Profile Page 1 Push Content Page 1 Pull Content Page 1 Name Description Connect 1 Connect Disconnect 2 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect 3 Connect Disconnect

The Profile Page components are described in the table below:

No.	Item Description
1	Name Lists the Profiles	available. Profiles give Receivers access to Channels and allow you to push the connection.
2	Description The field provides a description of the Profile that was entered when it was created.
3	Connect Click Connect and the Receiver will connect with the settings of that Profile (see Adding a Profile, page 264).
4	Disconnect Click Disconnect to end the current Profile connection.
5	Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page or to the end of the list if there are more Profiles available than can be seen on the page.
6	Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous page or to the beginning of the list if there are more Profiles available than can be seen on the page.
7	Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
8	Go to Configuration Window	Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

Push Content

Push Content allows you to push the Receiver's computer connection to another Receiver's console, allowing both to access to the computer. Select the Push Content tab and the following screen appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Push Content - 1

text_image

KE OSD ATEN Administrator Welcome to KE Connection Page 1 Profile Page 1 Push Content Page 1 Pull Content Page 1 User Station Name Description Connect KE8940R70 Push Content KE8950R72 Push Content C Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Content Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Control Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Interval Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persh Periods Persn Interval

The Push Content Page components are described in the table, below:

No.	Item Description
1	Receiver Name Lists the Receivers that can be selected to push the local Receiver's computer connection to.
2	Description The field provides a description of the Receiver that was entered when it was created.
3	Connect Click Push Content to push the local Receiver's computer connection to the selected Receiver's console. The local Receiver's computer connection will appear on the Receiver that it was pushed to and both will share access to the computer. The access mode selected at the local Receiver will determine how access is shared (see Transmitter Permissions, page 238 for details).
5	Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page or to the end of the list if there are more choices available than can be seen on the page.
6	Previous Arrow Use these two	buttons to navigate to the previous page or to the beginning of the list if there are more choices available than can be seen on the page.
9	Logout Click this button to log	out of the Connection Page.
10	Go to Configuration Window	Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

Pull Content

Pull Content allows you to pull a Receiver's computer connection to the local Receiver's console, allowing both to access to the computer. Click the Pull Content tab and the following screen appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Pull Content - 1

text_image

KE OSD ATEN Administrator, Welcome to KE. Connection Page 1 Profile Page 1 Push Content Page 1 Pull Content Page 1 User Station Name Channel Status Connect KE6340R70 KE6340T1 VAUS Share Pull Content KE850R72 KE850T61 VAUS Share Pull Content C Laptop Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nul Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nu Nus Nus Nus Nus Nus Nus Nus Nus Nus Nus Nus Nus Nus Nus

The Pull Content Page components are described in the table, below:

No.	Item Description
1	Receiver Name Lists the Receiver names currently connected to the Channel listed under Channel Status.
2	Channel Status Lists the name, description and access type of each available Channel connection.
3	Connect Click Pull Content and the Receiver will pull the Channel connection to the local console using the access mode displayed under Channel Status.
5	Next Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the next page or to the end of the list if there are more choices available than can be seen on the page.
6	Previous Arrow Use these two buttons to navigate to the previous page or to the beginning of the list if there are more choices available than can be seen on the page.
9	Logout Click this button to log out of the Connection Page.
10	Go to Configuration Window	Click this button to return to the main OSD screen.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Overview

The CCKM KVM over IP Matrix Manager is a browser based GUI that provides management of KE Series devices over a network. You can download the KVM over IP Matrix Manager for free and manage up to 8 KE devices, or purchase a license for the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. To purchase a license, contact your local authorized ATEN dealer. To download the free KVM over IP Matrix Manager, use the instructions below.

Download

To download the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, do the following:

Visit our website and click Support & Downloads → ESERVICE.

ATEN KE6910 - Download - 1

text_image

ATEN HOME MARKETS & SOLUTIONS PRODUCTS RESOURCES SUPPORT & DOWNLOADS ATEN Global Showroom Experience AV / IT in action! Book a Showroom Tour SERVICE PRODUCT REGISTRATION WARRANTY POLICY DOWNLOADS FAQ WINDOWS SUPPORT DISCONTINUED PRODUCTS

Under Account, click Create New or Log In.

ATEN KE6910 - Download - 2

text_image

ATEN Home Log In Language : English eService News FAQ Search > Keyword: Go + Advanced Search Language: □ 录体中文 □ 紫籍中文 □ English □ 日本語(日本) □ 한국어(한국어) □ Deutsch □ Français □ Italano □ Portugues □ Español □ pycocni Getting started on eService: • You can find answers quickly by entering model names or passwords into the FAO Search bar show Account • Log In • Create New Product Registration • Product Registration

After logging in, click Product Registration to register the KE device(s) you have purchased.

ATEN KE6910 - Download - 3

text_image

ATEN Home Sign Out Language: English eService News General Issue ISSUE 2019 Please log the required your product listing? [Main] Welcome: Brett Open Case > If the support did not show up it might be already closed, please click on "Advance eSupport Search" to increase the all cases. Type Last Weekly Date Status Account - Log In - Create New Product Registration - Product Registration Support - FAQ Search - ATEN Hotkey / Product & Device Compatibility List - Download Center - Ask a Question - Trouble Shooting

After you have registered the KE device(s), click Trial Software Download.

Product Register >

ATEN KE6910 - Download - 4

text_image

Insert Please press "Insert" button to start register your purchased ATEN product serial numbe. Trial Software Download

Serial Number	Model	Date of Purchase	Invoice / Shipping Document	Warranty Due Date	Action
12345678901235	KE6940	2015/10/20

Note: The downloaded version of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager includes full functions and can configure up to 8 KE Series devices. If you would like to configure more KE Series devices, please contact your ATEN reseller to purchase a license and upgrade the license of your software, see page 194.

Click the software version you would like to download, then click Save.

My Download >

FAQ Attachment Download Trial Software Download
File Title	Web Site	File Download
CCKM V2.0.193 (Linux version)	CCKM Trial link V2.0.193 (click download icon to download CCKM Linux version)
CCKMV2.0.193 (Windows version)	CCKM Trial link V2.0.193 (click download icon to download CCKM Windows version)

Unzip the cckm_win_Vx.x.xxx.zip or cckm_linux_Vx.x.xxx.zip file and double click the *.exe file to start the installation.
Follow the instructions on the next page to install the software.

KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install

The following are instructions to install the full version of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager on a primary or secondary computer. For software requirements, see CCKM Requirements, page 9.

Insert the USB license key into a USB port on your computer. If using a virtual license, skip this step and see Upgrading License, page 194, after the installation is complete.

Note: If you have more than 8 KE Series devices in your setup, a USB license key is required to install the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.

Double-click the KEMatrixManagerSetup file to start the setup. When the Introduction screen appears, click Next.

ATEN KE6910 - KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install - 1

text_image

KE Matrix Manager Introduction Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Shortcut Folder Pre-Installation Summary Installing Install Completes InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of KE Manager. If an old version of KE Manager was already installed, please uninstall the old version first, then install current version in the same folder to keep all data. Click the 'Next' button to proceed to the next screen. If you want to change something on a previous screen, click the 'Previous' button. You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. Cancel Previous Next

The License Agreement appears:

ATEN KE6910 - KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install - 2

text_image

KE Matrix Manager License Agreement Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Shortcut Folder Pre-Installation Summary Installing... Install Complete Installation and Use of KE Manager Requires Acceptance of the Following License Agreement: SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT LICENSE GRANT Aten International Co., Ltd. ("Licensor") grants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license to access and use KE Manager (the "Product") during the "Term" set forth below. You may install the Product on a hard disk or other storage device; install and use the Product on a file server for use on a network for the purposes of (i) permanent installation onto hard disks or other storage devices or (ii) use of the I accept the terms of the License Agreement I do NOT accept the terms of the License Agreement InstallAnywhere by Macromsion Cancel Previous Next

If you agree with the License Agreement, select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next.

The Choose Install Folder screen appears:

ATEN KE6910 - KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install - 3

text_image

KE Matrix Manager Choose Install Folder Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Short-cut Folder Pre-Installation Summary Instilling... Install Complete Where Would You Like to Install? C:\Program Files\KE Matrix Manager Restore Default Folder Choose... Install Anywhere by Macrovision Cancel Previous Next

Select where you would like to install the program, and click Next.

The Choose Shortcut Folder screen appears:

ATEN KE6910 - KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install - 4

text_image

KE Matrix Manager Choose Shortcut Folder Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Shortcut Folder Pre-Installation Summary Installing... Install Complete Where would you like to create product icons? In a new Program Group: KE Matrix Manager In an existing Program Group: Accessories In the Start Menu On the Desktop In the Quick Launch Bar Other: Choose... Don't create icons Create Icons for All Users Install Anywhere by Macrovision Cancel Previous Next

Select where to create shortcuts for the program by selecting the options provided, and click Next.

The Pre-Installation Summary screen appears:

ATEN KE6910 - KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install - 5

text_image

KE Matrix Manager Pre-Installation Summary Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Shortcut Folder Pre-Installation Summary Installing... Install Complete Please Review the Following Before Continuing: InstallAnywhere by Macrovision Cancel Previous Install

Confirm the settings you've selected. If you want to make a change click Previous to go back, or click Install to begin the software installation.

When the process is done, the Install Complete screen appears:

ATEN KE6910 - KVM over IP Matrix Manager Install - 6

text_image

KE MatrixManager Install Complete Congratulations! KE Manager has been successfully installed to: D:\IKE Manager Press "Done" to quit the installer. Install Anywhere by Macrosion Cancel Previous Done

Click Done.

Upgrading License

After you purchase a license to upgrade the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, go to the Settings - General tab (see page 269), and at the top page, select Click to Upgrade, and then browse for and activate your purchased license.

ATEN KE6910 - Upgrading License - 1

text_image

General ANMS FW Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions ▼ Basic KE Matrix Manager Version 2.1.202 (2018-02-06 02:03) Serial Number Click to Upgrade KE Matrix Manager Name KE Matrix Manager Description Language English Beeper Enable Disable CCKM Timeout 30,min(1-180)Disable ▼ Network Ports HTTP Port 8080 HTTPS Port 8443 Device Port 9110 ▼ Fast Switching Fast Switching Disable Enable 1643x14W ▼ Account Policy Enforce Password History 3Disable

Linux Installation

The following are instructions to install the full version of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager on a Linux server. For software requirements, see CCKM Requirements, page 9.

Download the KVM over IP Matrix Manager installation file to the Linux server.
Change the properties of the installation file so that its executable by running the command: chmod a+x filename

Example: chmod a+x kemanager_setup.bin

Start the installation with the command:

sudo sh ./kemanager_setup.bin

When the Introduction screen appears, click Next.:

ATEN KE6910 - Linux Installation - 1

text_image

KE Matrix Manager Introduction Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Smorbid Folder Pre-Installation Summary Installing... Install Complete InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of KE Manager. If an old version of KE Manager was already installed, please uninstall the old version first, then install current version in the same folder to keep all data. Click the 'Next' button to proceed to the next screen. If you want to change something on a previous screen, click the 'Previous' button. You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. Cancel Previous Next

The License Agreement appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Linux Installation - 2

text_image

KE Matrix Manager License Agreement Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Folder Choose Smirrict Folder Pre-Installation Summary Installing... Install Complete Installation and Use of KE Manager Requires Acceptance of the Following License Agreement: SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT LICENSE GRANT Aten International Co., Ltd. ("Licensor") grants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license to access and use KE Manager (the "Product") during the "Term" set forth below. You may install the Product on a hard disk or other storage device, install and use the Product on a file server for use on a network for the purposes of (i) permanent installation onto hard disks or other storage devices or (ii) use of the I accept the terms of the License Agreement I do NOT accept the terms of the License Agreement Install/Where By Macrosion Cancel Previous Next

If you agree with the License Agreement, select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next.

When the Choose Install Folder screen appears, select the location and continue through the installation by clicking Next.
After the software installs successfully, a directory provides useful links:

mitch@mitch-945GCM-S2L:/$ sudo -i
[sudo] password for mitch:
root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:~# ls -al
total 40
drwx---- 7 root root 4096 +二 14 13:42 .
drwxr-xr-x 25 root root 4096 +二 14 10:04 ..
-rw---- 1 root root 65 +二 14 13:42 .bash_history
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 3106 + 23 2015 .bashrc
drwx---- 2 root root 4096 七 20 04:49 .cache
drwx---- 3 root root 4096 +二 13 16:07 .gnupg
drwxrwxr-x 4 root root 4096 +二 14 13:29 .java
drwxrwxr-x 5 root root 4096 +二 14 13:39 KeManager
drwxrwxr-x 2 root root 4096 +二 14 09:58 .oracle_jre_usage
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 148 八 17 2015 .profile
root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:~# cd KeManager/
root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:~/KeManager# ls
kemanager Query_Service Uninstall_Matrix_Manager
_kemanager_installation Service_Manager
root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:~/KeManager#

The "Uninstall_Matrix_Manager" can be used to uninstall the software. By default the root folder can be accessed as shown below:

sudo -i cd /root cd KeManager sudo ./Uninstall_Matrix_Manager

To check and stop the KVM over IP Matrix Manager service, use the following commands:

cd KeManager sudo ./Query_Service Stop service: sudo ./Stop_Service

ATEN KE6910 - Linux Installation - 3

text_image

root@nitch-945GCM-S2L:-/KeManager# sudo ./Query_Service java version "1.8.0_121" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_121-b13) Java HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.121-b13, mixed node) VAJSW: yajsw-stable-11.04 OS : Linux/4.4.0-92-generic/amd64 JVM : Oracle Corporation/1.8.0_121 Sep 07, 2017 2:13:51 PM org.apache.commons.vfs2.VfsLog info INFO: Using "/tmp/vfs_cache" as temporary files store. Sep 07, 2017 2:13:52 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.posix.PosixService init INFO: /etc/init.d/jkemaker-service already exists Sep 07, 2017 2:13:52 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.posix.PosixService getpid INFO: wrapper pid file: /run/wrapper.kenanager-service.pid Name : kenanager-service Installed : true Running : false Interactive : false Automatic : false Manual : false Disabled : false Paused : false Unknown : false Press [Enter] ... root@nitch-945GCM-S2L:-/KeManager# cd Service Manager/ root@nitch-945GCM-S2L:-/KeManager/Service_Manager# ls Install Service Start Service Stop Service Uninstall Service root@nitch-945GCM-S2L:-/KeManager/Service_Manager# sudo ./Stop_Service java version "1.8.0_121" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_121-b13) Java HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.121-b13, mixed node) java version "1.8.0_121" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_121-b13) Java HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.121-b13, mixed node) VAJSW: yajsw-stable-11.04 OS : Linux/4.4.0-92-generic/amd64 JVM: Oracle Corporation/1.8.0_121 Sep 07, 2017 2:15:01 PM org.apache.commons.vfs2.VfsLog info INFO: Using "/tmp/vfs_cache" as temporary files store. Sep 07, 2017 2:15:02 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.posix.PosixService init INFO: /etc/init.d/jkemaker-service already exists ********** STOPPING kenanager-service ********** Sep 07, 2017 2:15:04 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.posix.PosixService stop INFO: Stopping kenanager-service ... VAJSW: yajsw-stable-11.04 OS : Linux/4.4.0-92-generic/amd64 JVM : Oracle Corporation/1.8.0_121 ********** STOPPING kenanager-service ********** Service kenanager-service stopped

To check and start the KVM over IP Matrix Manager service, use the following commands:

cd KeManager sudo ./Query Service Stop service: sudo ./Start service

ATEN KE6910 - Linux Installation - 4

text_image

root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:~/KeManager/Service_Manager# sudo ./Start_Service java version "1.8.0_121" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_121-b13) Java HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.121-b13, mixed mode) java version "1.8.0_121" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_121-b13) Java HotSpot(TM) 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.121-b13, mixed mode) YAJSW: yajsw-stable-11.04 DS : Linux/4.4.0-92-generic/amd64 DVM : Oracle Corporation/1.8.0_121 Sep 07, 2017 2:17:27 PM org.apache.commons.vfs2.VfsLog info INFO: Using "/tmp/vfs_cache" as temporary files store. Sep 07, 2017 2:17:28 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService init INFO: /etc/init.d/kemanager-service already exists ************************** STARTING kemanager-service ************************** Sep 07, 2017 2:17:28 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService getPid INFO: wrapper pid file: /run/wrapper.kemanager-service.pid Sep 07, 2017 2:17:33 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService start INFO: Starting kemanager-service ... YAJSW: yajsw-stable-11.04 DS : Linux/4.4.0-92-generic/amd64 DVM : Oracle Corporation/1.8.0_121 ************************** STARTING kemanager-service ************************** Service kemanager-service started Sep 07, 2017 2:17:33 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService getPid INFO: wrapper pid file: /run/wrapper.kemanager-service.pid Sep 07, 2017 2:17:34 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService getPid INFO: wrapper pid file: /run/wrapper.kemanager-service.pid Sep 07, 2017 2:17:34 PM org.rzo.yajsw.os.postix.PosixService getPid INFO: wrapper pid file: /run/wrapper.kemanager-service.pid Service kemanager-service started root@mitch-945GCM-S2L:~/KeManager/Service Manager#

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Overview

The CCKM KVM over IP Matrix Manager can be accessed through most standard web browsers and via Telnet. Once users log in and are authenticated, the browser GUI comes up. The first section explains the login procedure and web browser components. The last section provides details for connecting via Telnet.

Logging In

To log into the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, do the following:

Open the browser and specify the IP address of the computer installed with the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, in the browser's URL location bar.

Note: If the administrator has configured the HTTP or HTTPS port setting as something other than the default, you must include http://or https:// before the IP address, and specify the port number along with the IP address. For example:

https://192.168.1.20:8443

Where 8443 is the https port number, or 8080 is the http port number, and a colon is inserted between it and the IP address.

If a Security Alert box appears, accept the certificate – it can be trusted (See Trusted Certificates, page 407 for details). The Login page appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Logging In - 1

text_image

Enter the Username and Password and click Login.

Note: Only administrator accounts can be used to log in. By default, the username and password are administrator and password, respectively.

For security purposes, the system will prompt you to change the password immediately.

ATEN KE6910 - Logging In - 2

text_image

Warning For your safety, you have to change login password right away. OK

Click OK for the password change dialog box.

ATEN KE6910 - Logging In - 3

text_image

Change Password Password • • • • • • • Confirm CANCEL OK

Enter the new password and confirm it by entering the password again.
Click OK to complete the change and the KVM over IP Matrix Manager main page appears. Refer to the next page for more details.

The KVM over IP Matrix Manager Main Page

After you have successfully logged in, the web browser's main page appears:

ATEN KE6910 - The KVM over IP Matrix Manager Main Page - 1

text_image

ATEN | CCKM KE Matrix Manager Administrator: Horizons to the ICE Matrix Manager System Status Transmitter Active Standby Office Total 14 14 ... Receiver Active Standby Office Total 9 ... Switch Active Office Total 2 ... Users Profile Log Online Idle Total Next Schedule Information 1 8 None 211 58 440 ... Redundancy States: [Primary] Working Connections TX-RE MULTX Transmitter Receiver Unde Scheduled Profile Go to Schedule Instant Link

Web Components

The web components are described in the table below:

No.	Item Description
1	Install Wizard This icon helps	you locate Transmitters/Receivers on the LAN to add them to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager (see Installation Wizard, page 203). If a device can't be found, check the Network settings in the device's OSD menu (see page 161 & 168).
2	System Settings	Click this icon to enter the System Setting section where you can configure the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The Settings are discussed on page 269.
3	Logout Click this button to log	out of your KVM over IP Matrix Manager web session.
4	Interactive Display Panel This	is your main work area. Scroll the page up or down to view the various selections. Some items can be clicked to open a settings page, while others provide status information.
5	Instant Link Clicking this icon	opens the lower bar which allows you to instantly connect KE devices. Instant Link is discussed on page 209.

Interactive Display Panel

The functions associated with each of the icons on the main interactive display panel are explained in the table below:

Icon Function
	System Status: System Status provides an overview of the transmitter, receiver, user, profile, and log status. Each heading can be clicked to open the respective settings page. System Status is discussed on page 217.
	Connections: Connections provides a visual display of current transmitter and receiver connections. Connections is discussed on page 293.
	Scheduled Profile: Scheduled Profile provides an overview of connection profiles that are scheduled to run. Scheduled Profile is discussed on page 297.
	Sessions: Sessions provides a list of current user sessions. Sessions is discussed on page 299.
	Refresh: The Refresh button provides a way to update the information currently being displayed on the page.
	To Top: This button appears at the bottom right corner of the Interactive Display Panel and allows you to jump back to the top of the page.

Installation Wizard

Use the Install Wizard to add transmitters, receivers, and/or network switches to the CCKM. The wizard locates devices on the network and walks you through adding them. To add devices, do the following:

Connect all transmitters, receivers, and/or network switches to the LAN.
On the CCKM main page, click the Install Wizard icon (page 201). This dialog box appears.

Install Wizard

Select the device(s) you want to add.

ATEN KE6910 - Install Wizard - 1

Transmitter or Receiver

ATEN KE6910 - Install Wizard - 2

natural_image

Black electronic device with ports and a lid, no visible text or symbols

ATEN KE6910 - Install Wizard - 3

Network Switch

ATEN KE6910 - Install Wizard - 4

natural_image

Black networking device with multiple Ethernet ports (no visible text or labels)

CANCEL

To add transmitters and/or receivers, select Transmitter or Receiver, click Next, and refer to Adding Transmitters and Receivers, page 204.
To add network switches, select Network Switch, click Next, and refer to Adding Network Switches, page 207.

Adding Transmitters and Receivers

On the installation wizard for transmitters and receivers, select options to locate the devices:

Install Wizard

Connect all Transmitters and Receivers to the local area network.

□ Search Local
□ Search Subnet

ATEN KE6910 - Install Wizard - 1

ATEN KE6910 - Install Wizard - 2

Transmitter

[1]00-10-74-A9-01-12
☑ [2]00-10-74-A9-00-00

Receiver

[1]00-10-74-A8-00-00
(2)00-10-74-A8-01-03

CANCEL

Item Description
Search Local	Check this box and click the Refresh button to search the local area network for Transmitters/Receivers.
Search Subnet Check this box, enter a subnet IP and then click the Refresh button to search the subnet for Transmitters/Receivers.
Transmitter / Receiver	Displays the number of Transmitters and Receivers that have been discovered on the network. Use the check boxes next to the Transmitters/Receivers to select the devices you want to add.
	The Refresh button provides a way to update the information currently being displayed in the install wizard window.

Check the boxes under Transmitter / Receiver to select the devices you want to add, then click Next.
Under Assign IP Address select an option to configure the network settings, then click Next.

Install Wizard

2. Assign IP Address.

Transmitter

Receiver

IP Range

Transmitter

ATEN KE6910 - Receiver - 1

ATEN KE6910 - Receiver - 2

Receiver

ATEN KE6910 - Receiver - 3

ATEN KE6910 - Receiver - 4

DHCP

Use Original IP Setting

BACK

Item Description
IP Range	Select the IP Range radio button to enter a series of static IP addresses to assign to the Transmitters/ Receivers that you are adding.
DHCP	Select the DHCP radio button for dynamic IP address assignment.
Use Original IP Setting Select this radio button to use the IP address currently configured on the Transmitter/Receiver.

Use the Naming Rule radio button to create a naming convention (Title + Number); or Use Original Name to use the name currently configured on the Transmitter/Receiver, then click Next.

Install Wizard

3. Rename devices automatically.

○ Naming Rule

Transmitter

Title

+ Number start from

ATEN KE6910 - Rename devices automatically. - 1

Receiver

Title

+ Number start from

ATEN KE6910 - Rename devices automatically. - 2

Use Original Name

BACK

Confirm each Transmitter's Name, IP Address, Audio setting and check the boxes to set Permissions*, then click Next and repeat the process for Receivers.

Install Wizard

4. Confirm Transmitter information.

Permissions ☑ view Only ☑ Occupy ☑ Exclusive

No.	MAC	Name	IP Address
1	00-10-74-A9-01-12	KE6940T61	192.168.0.61
2	00-10-74-BD-01-23	KE8950T	192.168.0.63

BACK NEXT

Note: See Transmitter Permissions, page 238, and Receiver Permissions, page 251 for information about setting permissions.

Click Done.

Adding Network Switches

On the installation wizard for network switches, specify the search parameters to locate the devices:

ATEN KE6910 - Adding Network Switches - 1

text_image

Switch Wizard

Please enter a specific IP address and range to discover devices

ATEN KE6910 - Adding Network Switches - 2

text_image

IP Range Switch Manufacturer ✓ Search via SNMP v1 Port Community / User Name Timeout 161 1000 Milliseconds □ Search via SNMP v2c □ Search via SNMP v3

BACK NEXT

Item Description
IP Range	Specify the IP address range to search for the network switch to be added.
Switch Manufacturer Selects	the manufacturer of the network switch to be added.
Search via SNMP v1 / v2c / v3	Select to search via SNMP v1 / v2c / v3 by entering the corresponding Port, Community / Username and Timeout parameters

Check the boxes next to the network switch devices you want to add.
Optionally modify the Device Name of the network switch(es) to be added, then click Next.

ATEN KE6910 - Adding Network Switches - 3

text_image

Switch Wizard 2. Add device(s) Device Name ○ Model ○ MAC Address ○ IP Address ○ C50152-GA_11-s1111111 E50152 08.40.C7.T5.EB.DE 10.0.92.11 BACK NEXT

For optimal working with the KE Matrix System, make sure to enable the related network services and click Next.

ATEN KE6910 - Adding Network Switches - 4

text_image

Switch Wizard 3. Enable services for better connection In order to make sure the switch(es) could work well with KE system. The following configurations need to be enabled before you start to use. IGMP Snooping IGMP Querier Fast Leaver Unregistered Multicast Flow Control Speed Mode set to Auto SKIP NEXT

Click Done to finish.

Instant Link

At the bottom of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager Main Page is the Instant Link bar. In this section you can quickly connect Receivers to Transmitters.

The top panel provides the Receiver List, and the bottom panel provides the Transmitter List. To create a connection, click a Receiver in the top panel and use the drop-down menu to select a Transmitter (as shown in the image below); or drag-and-drop Transmitters from the bottom panel to Receivers in the top panel. Configure as many Receiver to Transmitter connections as needed, and then click Apply.

ATEN KE6910 - Instant Link - 1

Item Description
Instant Link The Instant Link	bar provides access to quickly connectReceivers to Transmitters. Click the bar to open the panel, click again to minimize the panel. The top panel provides a list of all the Receivers discovered on the LAN.Click a Receiver and use the drop-down menu to select a Transmitter.
Transmitter List Click the Tr	transmitter List bar to open the panel. The panel provides a list of all the Transmitters discovered on the LAN. Drag-and-drop Transmitters in the bottom panel to Receivers in the top panel to establish connections.The panel size of the Transmitter List is adjustable by clicking-and-dragging its border.
Location Use the drop-down	menu to select a location to filter theReceivers or Transmitters displayed on the page.
Ratio Use the drop-down list	to adjust the icon size of the Receivers / Transmitters.
Q	Click and type keywords to filter/search for Receivers / Transmitters.
	Click this icon to show individual Receivers.
	Click this icon to show only video wall Receivers.
	Click this icon to show only Receiver Group Receivers.
Access Mode Click a device	and use the drop-down box to set the access mode: Occupy, View Only, or Exclusive.
Auto Apply Checking this box	allows you to drag and drop devices and apply the connection immediately without having to click the Apply button.
Apply Click Apply to connect the devices.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without connecting.

RS-232 / Telnet

The KE Series can be operated and configured via a remote terminal session using Telnet. This is a useful means for configuring devices when they are first set up and connected to the network.

Telnet

To log into the KE Series device by means of a Telnet session, do the following:

On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session.
At the prompt, key in the KE device's IP address with port 23 in the following way:

telnet [IP address] [port]

Please press "T / t" to start "TextMenu" The login screen appears. At the login prompt, provide the Password.

ATEN KE6910 - Telnet - 1

text_image

Welcome to ATEN KE8950 User Station Copyright(c) 2009-2013 ATEN International Co., Ltd. --Press ENTER to start CLI session --Press T/t to start TextMenu : Password:***** ********************************************************************** KE8950 User Station User Station Configuration ********************************************************************** 1. Network 2. Properties 3. System Q. Logout Select one:

Note: The default password for Telnet sessions is password.

RS-232

To log into the KE Series device by means of a RS-232 session, do the following:

The controller's serial port should be configured the same as the Receiver's default configuration, as shown below:

Baud Rate 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None

The Receiver's Function Switch should be set to RS-232 Config (see page 44). Before executing RS-232 commands across a network you must install the KVM over IP Matrix Manager on a computer and ensure that it is online. For the Slim Version of KE Series (KE8900ST/8900SR/9900ST). Please make sure the RS-232 Serial Port is not connected before executing commands.

Please press "T / t" to start "TextMenu" The login screen appears. At the login prompt, provide the Password.

ATEN KE6910 - RS-232 - 1

text_image

Note: The default password for Telnet sessions is password.

Once a Telnet connection to the KE device is established, the device's text-based Configuration Menu comes up, allowing you to select options by entering a number on the following screens:

KE6900 Receiver

Receiver Configuration

Network
Properties
System
Q. Logout

Select one:

1. Network

KE6900 Receiver

Network Settings

IP Installer [Enabled]
DHCP [Disabled]
IP Address [172.17.17.34]
Subnet Mask [255.255.255.0]
Default Gateway [172.17.17.254]

Q. Exit

Select one:

2. Properties

KE6900 Receiver

Device Properties

Mode [Matrix]
Transmitter Video IP Address [172.17.17.35]
Transmitter Audio IP Address [172.17.17.35]
Transmitter USB IP Address [172.17.17.35]
Transmitter RS232 IP Address [172.17.17.35]
UART Configuration
Video [Enabled]
Audio [Enabled]
USB [Enabled]
RS232 [Enabled]
KVM over IP Matrix Manager IP [172.17.17.33]
KVM over IP Matrix Manager Port [9110]
Beeper [Enabled]
USB Mode [VM]
USB Secure Transmit [Disabled]

Q. Exit

Select one:

3. System

KE6900 Receiver

System Setting

Device Name [KE6900R]
Device Description [Receiver1]

Device IP Address: 172.17.17.34

Device MAC Address: 00:10:74:A8:01:23

Device FW Version: V1.1.109

Device Serial Number:

Password [Enabled]
Change Password
System Reboot/Reset to Factory Default

Q. Exit

Select one:

Note: The Reset to Factory Default function resets everything but the login information to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 6 System Status

Overview

The System Status panel is found at the top of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager main page. This section provides status information about

Transmitters, Receivers, Network Switches, Users, Profiles, and Logs. Click on a selection to open a Settings page, which are discussed in the sections that follow.

ATEN KE6910 - Overview - 1

text_image

CCKM KE Matrix Manager administrator: Welcome to the KE Matrix Manager System Status Transmitter Active Standby Offins Total 14 14 0 0 14 14 Receiver Active Standby Offins Total 9 0 0 9 Switch Active Offins Total 2 2 Users Profile Log Online Idle Total Next Schedule Warning Error Infestation 1 8 None 211 58 446 Redundancy States: Primary (Working) Connections TX-RX RX-TX Receiver Transmitter Undo ▲ Instant Link

System Status

The System Status panel contains six sections that provide information and a link to each settings page. Each settings page can be accessed by Clicking within the section: Transmitter, Receiver, Switch, Users, Profile, or Log. Each section is explained in the table below and the Settings on the pages that follow.

ATEN KE6910 - System Status - 1

other

System Status | Category | Transmitter | Receiver | Switch | Users | Profile | Log | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | Active | 0 | 0 | 2 | Online | Idle | 1 | | Standby | 0 | 0 | 0 | Idle | 8 | 3 | | Offline | 14 | 14 | 0 | 0 | None | 0 | | Total | 14 | 9 | 2 | 0 | None | 0 | Redundancy Status: [Primary] [Working]

Item Description
Transmitter This section provides an overview of the Transmitters added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager:Active: Shows the number of Transmitters that are currently online and connected to a Receiver.Standby: Shows the number of Transmitters that are online but not connected to a Receiver Offline: Shows the number of Transmitters added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager that are not online.Total: Displays the total number of Transmitters added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
Receiver This section provides an overview of the Receivers added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager:Active: Shows the number of Receivers that are currently online and connected to a Transmitter.Standby: Shows the number of Receivers that are online but not connected to a Transmitter Offline: Shows the number of Receivers added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager that are not online.Total: Displays the total number of Receivers added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
Switch This section provides	an overview of the Network Switches added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager:Active: Shows the number of Network Switches added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager that are currently online Offline: Shows the number of Network Switches added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager that are not online.Total: Displays the total number of Network Switches added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
Users This section provides	an overview of users with KVM over IP Matrix Manager sessions:Online: Shows the number of users that are logged into OSD or KVM over IP Matrix Manager web sessions.Idle: Shows the number of users not logged into OSD or KVM over IP Matrix Manager web sessions.
Profile This section provides	an overview of Profile and Profile Schedules:Total: Shows the total number of Profiles available.Next scheduled to run: Shows the name of the next Profile scheduled to run.Days later: Shows the number of days until the next Profile is scheduled to run.
Log This section provides an	overview of system logs:Warning: Shows the number of warnings logs generated since the event log was cleared.Error: Shows the number of error logs generated since the event log was cleared.Information: Shows the number of information logs generated since the log was cleared.
Redundancy Status	This section provides information about the Redundancy mode. The first set of brackets shows which server is hosting the KVM over IP Matrix Manager database:[Primary] or [Secondary]. If Redundancy is disabled the first bracket will read: [Standalone]. The second set of brackets show the status:[Working]: The server is actively hosting the KVM over IP Matrix Manager database.[Standby]: This message appears when database operations are idle.

Transmitter

Click Transmitter in the System Status panel to open the settings. On this page you can add, delete and configure Transmitters (physical transmitters), Virtual Transmitters (multi-source) and Transmitter Groups (multi-video source). The KVM over IP Matrix Manager automatically adds Transmitters connected to the local area network with a valid IP address.

ATEN KE6910 - Transmitter - 1

text_image

Transmitter Receiver User Account Profile Log Active Standby Offline All Devices KE6940T87 KE6940T KE6940T1 KE6940T KE6900ST KE6900ST KE8950T61 KE8950T VirtualTX virtual TX GroupTX KE6940T87 KE6940T KE6950T61 KE8950T

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let you view and configure Transmitters.

Active refers to a Transmitter connection that is online and in use.
Standby refers to a Transmitter connection that is online.
- Offline refers to a Transmitter connection that is offline.
- All Devices ▼ Use this drop-down menu to filter Transmitters by location. Use Locations to limit the Transmitters seen on the page.

- Click to add a new Location.
Select a Transmitter and click the Move to icon to add devices to a Location.
✗ Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this icon to delete it.

Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.

/ Click to turn Beeper & LED Flashing on/off.
Click to delete selected Transmitters.
Click an option to have selected Transmitters:

Copy & Paste: Copy settings from one Transmitter and paste them to another (see Copy & Paste, page 233).
Reboot: Shut down and restart.
♦ Reset to Factory: Reset all setting to the factory default.

Note: The Reset to Factory function resets everything but the login information to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.

- Click to Create Virtual TX or Create TX Group (page 234 & 237).
Click to set Transmitter permissions (page 238).
Click to search for Transmitters.
Click to filter Transmitters shown on the page.
Click to switch between Grid View and List View.

SFP Module Detection

When an SFP module is used on the Transmitter added, the CCKM can automatically detect and display its type, between Fiber and Copper, as exemplified below.

ATEN KE6910 - SFP Module Detection - 1

text_image

Copper L-FP U-FP KE6922T KE6922T

Transmitter Configuration

When the KVM over IP Matrix Manager discovers Transmitters on the network they appear on the Transmitter settings page. Double-click a Transmitter to configure its settings.

ATEN KE6910 - Transmitter Configuration - 1

text_image

Transmitter Configuration Basic Device Name KE69007.1 Description Location All Mode Extender Matrix Enable Media Video Audio USB RS232 EDID Mode ATEN Default Multicost Video Enable Disable Multicost Audio Enable Disable Occupy Timeout 5 sec(0-340) Port OS Win10 version 1803 or later OS Language English (US) CCKM IP 10.0 62.06 9116 IP Installation Enable Disable View Only RS232 Settings Board Rate 9600 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Flow Control None Data Bits $ Video Settings Video Type DWLD - DWLD Color Depth 24 Bandwidth Unlanated Video Quality Longless Background Refresh Every 31 frames IP Settings DHCP Manual IP Address 185.188.6.61 Socket Mask 218.265.251.0 Default Gateway Password Protection Disable Enable Password Confirm CANCEL

Note: For transmitter models with Internet Port (AiT models), the settings page above is under the “Main” tab. An extra “Internet Port” tab is available. For more information, refer to Internet Port (AiT models only) on page 227.

ATEN KE6910 - Transmitter Configuration - 2

text_image

Transmitter Configuration Main Internet Port Basic Device Name KE6940AIT Description Video Settings Video Type DVI-D + DVI-D Color Depth 24

Item Description

Basic Device Name: Enter a name for the Transmitter.

Description: Enter a description for the Transmitter.

Location: Use the drop-down menu to select a Location for the device. Locations filter the Transmitters seen on the settings page.

Mode: Use the radio button to select how the Transmitter will be installed and managed:

Select Extender mode for simple one-to-one (Transmitter to Receiver) setups that are managed at the Receiver's OSD menu.

Select Matrix mode to manage devices and connections over the LAN from the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. This mode is for advanced administration of Transmitter and Receiver connections configured within the KVM over IP Matrix Manager Web GUI.

Enable Media: Select which source type the Transmitter can stream: Video, Audio, USB and RS232.

Audio Input: Use this option to select the Transmitter's audio source signal: HDMI, Analog, or Auto. This setting should reflect the audio setting configured on the computer.*

Item Description
Basic	EDID Mode: EDID contains a display's basic information and is used by the source device to utilize the best resolution across different monitors. When Manual or Remix is selected, the Receiver's OSD will have a button allowing the local EDID setting to be configured for the connection (see EDID Mode, page 181). Select how you want the source device to acquire the display's EDID:♦ ATEN Default: EDID is set to the default ATEN configuration. This setting must be used when connecting KE6900 devices to KE8950 devices.♦ Auto: Checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays.♦ Manual: Manually set the EDID configuration from the Receiver's OSD (see EDID Mode, page 181).♦ Remix: Manually checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays (see EDID Mode, page 181).Multicast Video: Select Enable to allow a broadcast of the Transmitter's video signal to be sent to multiple Receivers.Multicast Audio: Select Enable to allow a broadcast of the Transmitter's audio signal to be sent to multiple Receivers.♦ Occupy Timeout: Set a time threshold for Receivers whose Access Mode has been set to Occupy If there is no activity from the Receiver occupying the port for the amount of time set here, the Receiver is timed out and the port is released. The first Receiver to send keyboard or mouse input after the port has been released gets to occupy the port. Input a value from 1 to 240 seconds.Port OS: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating system on the computer connected to the Transmitter.OS Language: Use the drop-down menu to select the operating system language on the computer connected to the Transmitter.CCKM IP: Set the IP address and Port number of the computer running the KVM over IP Matrix Manager. The default port number is 9110.IP Installer: The IP Installer is an external Windows-based utility for assigning an IP address to the device. Click a radio button to select Enable, Disable or View Only for the IP Installer utility. See IP Installer, page 406 for instructions.
Video Settings These refer to the Transmitter's video settings:
		Video Type: Select the DVI video connector being used by the display: Digital (DVI-D) or Digital (DVI-I). This option is only available for KE6900 units.
		Color Depth: Select the number of bits to use for the color depth: 24, 16, or 8. This is the number of bits used to describe the color of a single pixel. A bit depth determines the number of colors that can be displayed at one time.
		Bandwidth Limit: Select the maximum bandwidth that the Transmitter can use to transmit video over the network. A lower bandwidth transmits lower quality video; a higher bandwidth sends higher quality video but this can affect network speed.
		Video Quality: Select the video quality to use, with the highest to lowest quality being Lossless > Light Compression > Medium Compression > Heavy Compression > Maximum Compression.
		Background Refresh: Sets how often the Transmitter refreshes the background image on the connected display. Options are to refresh every 256,128, 64, 32,16, or 0 frames.
IP Settings	For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway select the Manual radio button and fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network. For information to configure the network settings locally on the device, see Network Configuration, page 151.
Password Protection	Select Enable to require a password to access the Transmitter's OSD configuration screens (see page 161). Enter a Password, and confirm the password in the Confirm box.
RS232 Settings Con	Configure the serial device settings for the Transmitter. The default settings are: Baud Rate: 9600 Parity: None Data Bits: 8 bits Stop bits: 1 bit Flow Control: None
Item Description
Replace Device	Click Replace Device in the top left corner to replace an old Transmitter with a new one.* All settings are copied from the old Transmitter to the new Transmitter. Before using this feature, connect the new Transmitter to the network. After clicking Replace Device, use the drop-down menu to select the new Transmitter where the settings will be applied.Note:1. This option only appears when a Transmitter is offline.2. This feature can be used for both Receivers and Transmitters. Replacement should be carried out on a similar model.
Save Click Save to	save changes to the properties.
Cancel Click Cancel	to exit without saving.

Internet Port (AiT models only)

For transmitter models (AiT models) with Internet Port, an “Internet Port tab” is available for configuration.

ATEN KE6910 - Internet Port (AiT models only) - 1

text_image

Transmitter Configuration Main | Internet Port Basic IP Installer Enable Disable View Only Program Port 9000 HTTP Port 80 HTTPS Port 443 CCVSR Disable Enable MAC address Service Port Working Mode Enable ICMP Disable Browser Service Disable Browser Enable Client AP Device List IPv4 Settings DHCP Manual IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Set DNS server address manually Preferred DNS server: Alternate DNS server IPv6 Settings DHCP Manual IP Address Prefix length Default Gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Set DNS server address manually Preferred DNS server: Alternate DNS server. Private Certificate Private Key Browse Certificate Browse Send Restore Default Certificate Signing Request Certificate Browse Create CSR Get CSR Upload Remove CSR CANCEL SAVE

Basic

■ IP Installer

Ports

Specify the ports that the transmitter uses for various network services.

Program: This is the port number for connecting to the transmitter from the Windows Client and Java Viewers, and from the Windows and Java Client AP programs. The default is 9000.
HTTP: The port number for a browser login. The default is 80.
HTTPS: The port number for a secure browser login. The default is 443.

Note: 1. Valid entries for all of the Service Ports are from 1–65535.

The service ports cannot have the same value. You must set a different value for each one.
If there is no firewall (on an intranet, for example), it does not matter what these numbers are set to, since they have no effect.

CCVSR

Important operations occur on the transmitter can be recorded using the CCVSR program.

Check Enable to enable the CCVSR function and specify the MAC address and the Service Port of the computer the CCVSR runs on.

Note: The valid port range is 1–65535. The port number must differ than the one used for the Program port (see Ports, page 228).

Mode

Use this section to set the working mode parameters.

Enable ICMP: Check to enable ICMP service.
Disable Browser Service: Check to disable a particular access. Available options are: browser, http or https.
Enable Client AP Device List: Check to enable this function. When enabled, the unit will be discoverable in the Server List when using the WinClient or Java Client AP (see Starting Up on page 311). Disabling this function will render the unit undiscoverable in the Server List but can still be connected to.

IPv4 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IP address assigned dynamically at boot-up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IP address.

For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This is the default setting.)
To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the IP address.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically, or a fixed address can be specified.

For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.
To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

IPv6 Settings

The transmitter can either have its IPv6 address assigned dynamically at boot-up (DHCP), or it can be given a fixed IPv6 address.

For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button. (This is the default setting.)
To specify a fixed IP address, select the Manual radio button and fill in the IP address.

The transmitter can either have its DNS server address assigned automatically, or a fixed address can be specified.

For automatic DNS Server address assignment, select the Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.
To specify a fixed address, select the Set DNS server address manually radio button and fill in the required information.

Note: Specifying at the alternate DNS Server address is optional.

Private Certificate

When logging in over a secure (SSL) connection, a signed certificate is used to verify that the user is logging in to the intended site. For enhanced security, the Private Certificate section allows you to use your own private encryption key and signed certificate, rather than the default ATEN certificate.

There are two methods for establishing your private certificate: generating a self-signed certificate and importing a third-party certificate authority (CA) signed certificate.

Generating a Self-Signed Certificate

If you wish to create your own self-signed certificate, a free utility – openssl.exe – is available for download over the web. See Self-Signed Private Certificates, page 408 for details about using OpenSSL to generate your own private key and SSL certificate.

Obtaining a CA Signed SSL Server Certificate

For the greatest security, we recommend using a third party certificate authority (CA) signed certificate. To obtain a third party signed certificate, go to a CA (Certificate Authority) website to apply for an SSL certificate. After the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on your computer.

Importing the Private Certificate

To import the private certificate, do the following:

Click Browse to the right of Private Key, navigate to where your private encryption key file is located and select it.
Click Browse to the right of Certificate, navigate to where your certificate file is located and select it.
Click Upload to complete the procedure.

Note: Both the private encryption key and the signed certificate must be imported at the same time.

You can click Restore Default to restore any changes made previously.

Certificate Signing Request

The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) section provides an automated way of obtaining and installing a CA signed SSL server certificate.

To perform this operation, do the following:

Click Create CSR. The following dialog box appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Certificate Signing Request - 1

text_image

Certificate Signing Request Country (2 letter code) State or Province Locality Organization Unit Common Name Email Address CANCEL CREATE

Fill in the form – with entries that are valid for your site – according to the example information in the following table:

Information Example
Country (2 letter code) TW
State or Province Taiwan
Locality Taipei
Organization Your Company, Ltd.
Unit Techdoc Department
Common Name mycompany.comThis must be the exact domain name of the site that you want the certificate to be valid for. If the site's domain name is www.mycompany.com, and you only specify mycompany.com, the certificate will not be valid.
Email Address administrator@yourcompany.com

After filling in the form (all fields are required), click Create.

A self-signed certificate based on the information you just provided is now stored on the transmitter.

Click Get CSR, and save the certificate file (csr.cer) to a convenient location on your computer

This is the file that you give to the third party CA to apply for their signed SSL certificate.

After the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on your computer. Click Browse to locate the file; then click Upload to store it on the transmitter.

Note: When you upload the file, the transmitter checks the file to make sure the specified information still matches. If it does, the file is accepted; if not, it is rejected.

If you want to remove the certificate (to replace it with a new one because of a domain name change, for example), simply click Remove CSR.

Copy & Paste

Copy & Paste allows you to copy settings from one Transmitter and paste them to another. To copy Transmitter settings to another device, do the following:

Select a Physical Transmitter.
On the Transmitter menu bar, click Copy & Paste (page 221).
Check the boxes of the settings you want to copy, and click Next.

ATEN KE6910 - Copy & Paste - 1

text_image

Copy & Paste 1. Please select the items you want to copy. Select All Unselect All Basic Description Location Mode Enable Media EDID Mode Multicast Video Multicast Audio Occupy Timeout Port OS OS Language CCKM IP IP Installer R$232 Settings Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Flow Control Video Settings Video Type Color Depth Bandwidth Video Quality Background Refresh CANCEL NEXT

Select the Transmitter(s) where you want to apply the settings, and click Done.

Copy & Paste

Please select the targets you want to paste.

ATEN KE6910 - Copy & Paste - 1

text_image

Select All Unselect All □ KE8940T62 □ KE8950T PREVIOUS DONE

Virtual Transmitter

Creating a Virtual Transmitter allows you to create one connection that sources media (KVM, audio, USB, serial) from different Transmitters. Virtual Transmitters appear on the Transmitter settings page with Virtual TX in the top right corner. Simply select an online Transmitter for each media source. Dual Display Transmitters can be added as two separate Virtual Transmitters.

To create a Virtual Transmitter, in Transmitter settings click + and then select Create Virtual TX.

ATEN KE6910 - Virtual Transmitter - 1

text_image

Create Virtual TX Name VirtualTX Description Location All Devices Video + Keyboard + Mouse -- Audio -- USB Peripheral -- Serial -- CANCEL APPLY

Item Description
Name Enter a name for the Virtual Transmitter.
Description Enter a description for the Virtual Transmitter.
Location Use	the drop-down menu to select a location for the Virtual Transmitter or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 220, for details.
Video + Keyboard + Mouse	Use the drop-down menu to select a KVM (keyboard, video, mouse) source for the Virtual Transmitter.
Audio Use the drop-down menu to select an audio source for the Virtual Transmitter.
USB Peripheral	Use the drop-down menu to select a USBPeripheral source for the Virtual Transmitter.
Serial Use the drop-down menu to select a serial source for the Virtual Transmitter.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Intelligent Dual Video Output Management

For the A models (KE6900A, KE6940A), the Intelligent Dual Video Output Management feature allows the separation of a Dual Display Transmitter's (KE6940AT) video outputs (DVI:1 and DVI:2) as two separate Virtual Transmitters. These separated outputs can be accessed from different Receivers (KE6900AR or KE6940AR). Receivers can switch between and connect to both Virtual Transmitters independently with the Access Type determining which Receiver has control (see page 238).

To use this setup, install the KE devices as shown below and create two Virtual Transmitters, selecting DVI:1 and DVI:2 as the KVM source for each Virtual Transmitter.

For non-A model receivers (e.g. KE6910R, KE6912R), you can select between DVI:1 or DVI:2, but you will always be getting video output from DVI:1.

ATEN KE6910 - Intelligent Dual Video Output Management - 1

flowchart

graph LR
    A["PC with Dual Video Output"] -->|Virtual TX - DVI1| B["KE6940AT"]
    A -->|Virtual TX - DVI2| B
    B --> C["Gigabit Network Switch with IGMP"]
    C -->|DVI1| D["KE6900AR"]
    C -->|DVI2| E["KE6900AR"]

When connecting to either of the two Virtual Transmitters in the setup shown above, the mouse cursor may reside on the main or extended dual display screen, out of view. Therefore even if you have control of the mouse it may not be visible. To bring the mouse cursor into view on either of the dual display screens, first enable Boundless Switching (see Boundless Switching, page 250) and then use the hotkey F8+F9.

Transmitter Group

Creating a Transmitter Group allows you to create a connection that sources the video from multiple Transmitters to view at across multiple Receiver displays. To use this feature, connect a Transmitter Group to a Receiver Group (page 247). Transmitter Groups appear at the bottom of the Transmitter settings page.

To create a Transmitter Group, in Transmitter settings click + and then select Create Group TX.

ATEN KE6910 - Transmitter Group - 1

text_image

Create Group TX Name Audio Description USB Serial Location: All Devices From the same PC video output Select a physical transmitter... KE6940T67 KE6940T KE6940T1 KE6940T KE6900ST KE6900ST KE8950T61 KE8950T CANCEL SAVE

Fill in the appropriate information and then double-click or drag-and-drop Transmitters to add or remove them in the top panel. The Transmitters in the top panel will be used as the video source for the Receiver Group at the Receiver.

Item Description
Name Enter a name for the	Transmitter Group.
Description Enter a description	on for the Transmitter Group.
Location Use the drop-down	menu to select a location for theTransmitter Group or leave as All Devices. See Location, page 220, for details.
From the same PC video output	Enable to indicate that all of the video outputs in this Transmitter Group are from the same multi-screen PC.
Save Click Save to save the	changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit	without saving.

Note: 1. You can create up to 4 transmitter groups.

Any transmitter can only be added to 1 transmitter group with the From the same PC video output option selected at a time.

Transmitter Permissions

Transmitter Permissions sets the users and groups that can access a Transmitter, Virtual Transmitter, and Transmitter Group.

Select a device under Transmitter List, and then next to each user or group click All, View, Occupy, or Exclusive to grant them permission to connect to the Transmitter with this access type. A green block denotes that the user has access.

To set Transmitter Permissions, in Transmitter settings, click

ATEN KE6910 - Transmitter Permissions - 1

ATEN KE6910 - Transmitter Permissions - 2

Item Description
Transmitter List	Lists Transmitters, Virtual Transmitters and Transmitter Groups that can be selected to set permissions.
Drop-Down Menu	Use the drop-down menu to selectUser or Group. After making a selection, the list of users or groups appears. Set permissions by selecting the access type (All, View,Share, Occupy, Exclusive) next to each user or group.
Access Type Select the access you want to grant to a user or group by clicking the boxes under the headings. This defines how the Transmitter can be accessed by a user or group. The access type will appear available for the user in the Receiver's OSD Connections menu. To disable an access type, uncheck a box in the heading.All: Select to grant all access permissions, View, Share, Occupy and Exclusive, to the users or user groups.View: User can only view the remote screen, and cannot perform operations on it.Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input from the users is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.Occupy: The first user to access the Transmitter has control. However, additional users may view the Transmitter's video. If the user who controls the Transmitter is inactive for longer than the time set in the Transmitter's Timeout box, control is transferred to the first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.
Access Type	Exclusive: The first user to access the Transmitter has exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other users can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function does not apply when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Receiver

Click Receiver in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Receiver page allows you to add, delete and configure Receivers (physical receivers), Receiver Groups, and Video Walls. The KVM over IP Matrix Manager automatically adds Receivers connected to the local area network with a valid IP address.

ATEN KE6910 - Receiver - 1

text_image

Transmitter Receiver User Account Profile Log Active Standby Offline AI Devices KE6900R71 KE6900R KE6940R270 KE6940R KE8950R72 KE8950R VideoWall Layout1 KE6900R71 KE6900R

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let you view and configure Receivers.

Active refers to a Receiver connection that is online and in use.
Standby refers to a Receiver connection that is online.
- Offline refers to a Receiver connection that is offline.
- All Devices ▼ Use this drop-down menu to filter Receivers by location. Use Locations to limit the Receivers seen on the page.

- Click to add a new Location.
Select a Receiver and click the Move to icon to add devices to a Location.
✗ Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this icon to delete it.

Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.

/ Click to turn Beeper & LED Flashing on/off.
Click to delete selected Receivers.
Click an option to have selected Receivers:

Copy & Paste: Copy settings from one Receiver and paste them to another (see Copy & Paste, page 245).
Reboot: Shut down and restart.
Reset to Factory: Reset all setting to the factory default.

Note: The Reset to Factory function resets everything but the login information to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409.

- Click to Create Receiver Group or Video Wall (page 247 & 248).
Click to set Receiver permissions (page 251).
Click to search for Receivers.
Click to filter Receivers shown on the page.
Click to switch between Grid View and List View.

SFP Module Detection

When an SFP module is used on the Receiver added, the CCKM can automatically detect and display its type, between Fiber and Copper, as exemplified below.

ATEN KE6910 - SFP Module Detection - 1

text_image

KE6922R KE6922R-3 Copper L-SFP U-SFP

Receiver Configuration

When the KVM over IP Matrix Manager discovers Receivers on the network they appear on the Receiver settings page. Double-click a Transmitter to configure its settings.

Receiver Configuration

Basic
ATEN KE6910 - Receiver Configuration - 1

text_image

Device Name KE69408-17 Description Location All Mode Extender Matrix Enable Media Video Audio USB RS232 CCKM IP 10.0.90.132 0110 IP Installer Enable Disable View Only

Extender Properties
ATEN KE6910 - Receiver Configuration - 2

text_image

Transmitter Video IP 192.168.0.61 Transmitter Audio IP 192.168.0.61 Transmitter USB IP 192.168.0.61 Transmitter RS232 IP 192.168.0.61

RS232 Settings
ATEN KE6910 - Receiver Configuration - 3

text_image

Band Rate 9600 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Floor Control None

IP Settings
ATEN KE6910 - Receiver Configuration - 4

text_image

DECP Manual IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway

Password Protection
ATEN KE6910 - Receiver Configuration - 5

text_image

Disable Enable Password Confirm

USB Mode

ATEN KE6910 - Receiver Configuration - 6

text_image

Mode Virtual Media Generic USB Device Encryption Enable

Item Description
Basic Device Name: Enter a name for the Receiver.































































IP Settings	For dynamic IP address assignment, select the DHCP radio button.To specify a fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway select the Manual radio button and fill in the fields with values appropriate for your network.For information to configure the network settings locally on the device, see Network Configuration, page 151.
Password Protection	Select Enable to require a password to access the Receiver's OSD configuration screen (see page 159).Enter a Password, and confirm the password in the Confirm box.
USB Mode Select	the type of USB device you will connect to the USB ports:Virtual Media: Only select this option if you are plugging a USB flash drive into the USB ports. This will give you the highest data transfer speeds but cannot work with other USB devices. When Receivers mount or unmount USB flash drives, the keyboard and mouse operations will experience a brief delay. Each Transmitter and Receiver can respectively support up to 12 and 3 virtual media connections at the same time (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Note: KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters only support up to 3 virtual media connections.vUSB (generic USB device): Use this option to plug USB peripherals into the USB ports. KE6900ST / KE8900ST / KE9900ST transmitters do not support vUSB (generic USB device) mode. In this mode, KE6900T / KE6940T and all Receivers support up to 2 USB connections, and all Transmitters support up to 5 USB connections (including Tx local console USB keyboard and mouse).Encryption: Check this box to encrypt USB disk drives plugged into the USB ports.Note: The vUSB option also allows a keyboard and mouse with special functions to be plugged into the USB ports for console use. Use this only if the special functions of the keyboard or mouse are required but do not work when plugged into the console ports. When the keyboard and mouse are plugged into the USB ports, they will not work within the OSD menus. To work within the OSD menus, the keyboard and mouse must be plugged into the console ports.
Item Description
Replace Device	Click Replace Device in the top left corner to replace an old Receiver with a new one.* All settings are copied from the old Receiver to the new Receiver. Before using this feature, connect the new Receiver to the network. After clicking Replace Device, use the drop-down menu to select the new Receiver where the settings will be applied.Note:1. This option only appears when a Transmitter is offline.2. This feature can be used for both Receivers and Transmitters. Replacement should be carried out on a similar model.
Save Click Save to save changes to the properties.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Copy & Paste

Copy & Paste allows you to copy settings from one Receiver and paste them to another. To copy Receiver settings to another device, do the following:

Select a Physical Receiver.
On the Receiver menu bar, click Copy & Paste (page 241).
Check the boxes of the settings you want to copy, and click Next.

Copy & Paste

1. Please select the items you want to copy.

Select All

Unselect All

□ Basic

□ Description
□ Location
□ Mode
□ Enable Media
□ CCKMIP
□ IP Installer

USB Mode

□ Mode
□ Encryption

RS232 Settings

□ Baud Rate
Parity
Data Bils
□ Stop Bits
Flow Control

□ Extender Properties

□ Transmitter Video IP
Transmitter Audio IP
□ Transmitter USB IP
Transmitter RS232 IP

CANCEL

Select the Receiver(s) where you want to apply the settings, and click Done.

ATEN KE6910 - Please select the items you want to copy. - 1

text_image

Copy & Paste 2. Please select the targets you want to paste. Select All Unselect All □ KE8940R62 □ KE8950R94 PREVIOUS3 DONE

Receiver Group

Creating a Receiver Group allows you to connect the video from multiple transmitters to multiple Receiver displays. To use this feature, connect a Transmitter Group (page 237) to a Receiver Group (see Instant Link, page 209). Receiver Groups appear at the bottom of the Receiver settings page.

To create a Receiver Group, in Receiver settings, click + and then select Create RX Group.

ATEN KE6910 - Receiver Group - 1

text_image

Create Rx Group Name Description Location: All Devices Select from single receiver... Boundless Switching: Enable Double Group Login: Enable Double KE6900R71 KE6900R KE6940R70 KE6940R CANCEL SAVE

Fill in the appropriate information and then double-click or drag-and-drop Receivers to add or remove them in the top panel. The Receivers in the top panel will be used to view the video from the Transmitter Group. To connect a Transmitter Group to a Receiver Group, see Instant Link, page 209.

Item Description
Name Enter a name for the Receiver Group.
Description Enter a description for the Receiver Group.
Location Use the drop-down menu to select a location for the Receiver Group or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 220, for details.
Boundless Switching	Use the radio button to enable or disable Boundless Switching. See Boundless Switching, page 250 for details.
Group Login When enabled, users logging into or out of 1 receiver automatically logs into or out of all other receivers within the Receiver Group, using the same set of credentials.
Save Click Save to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Note: You can create up to 4 receiver groups.

Video Wall

Creating a Video Wall allows you to create connections that combine Receiver displays to form a large video wall. Use the options to group multiple Receivers in the video wall. A video wall can contain multiple forms of single displays and grouped displays in various layouts. Video Walls appear listed below Receivers, on the Receivers settings page.

To create a Video Wall, in Receiver settings, click + and then select Create Video Wall.

ATEN KE6910 - Video Wall - 1

text_image

Create Video Wall Rx OSD: 1. Name Name: VideoWall Description 2. Number of Displays → Horizontal 2 ↓ Vertical 2 3. Bezel Dimension(unit:mm) 20 20 4. Layout Selection Videovall Spider Customized 5. Location Unallocated 6. Boundless Switch Enable Disable Fit Mode Height Width Scale KE6900R71 KE6940R70 - - - - - - CANCEL SAVE

Select the number of displays and then group multiple displays to form large screens and/or use single displays for independent screens to create the video wall's layout. Click the bar -- under the display icon to select a Receiver for each display. This configuration should match the actual video wall layout.

Item Description

Name Enter a name for the Video Wall.

Description Enter a description for the Video Wall.

Number of Displays Use the Horizontal and Vertical drop-down menus to select the number of displays that make up the video wall (a maximum of 64 are supported). Match this to the physical layout of the displays. Click the refresh icon to update the layout.

Item Description
Bezel Dimension	Use the two boxes to increase/decrease the frame size of each active display.
Lock / Unlock	Click the monitor toLockthe (2) bezel settings, so that when one size is changed they all change.Click the monitor toUnlockthe (2) bezel settings, so that each size can be set independently.
Layout Selection	Click + orXto add or remove additional layouts to the Video Wall. The options listed here will appear in a drop-down menu for the Video Wall, allowing you to quickly choose different layouts from the Receiver settings page. Arrows below the Layout Selection box allow you to move up or down in the list.Three layout templates are available for quick setup. The Videowall and Splitter options can not be changed but allow you to select the Receivers. These three layouts can not be deleted.◆Video Wallprovides a basic full screen layout where one Transmitter connects to multiple Receivers to display the video together as one full screen.◆Splitterprovides a layout that connects a Transmitter to multiple Receivers that show the same video displayed on separate screens independently.3.Customizedprovides a basic full screen layout that can be configured into groups (seeGroupbelow) as desired.*When using the KE6940R inCustomized layouts, only the KE6940's first video port will display video because each port's video source is independent. When using the KE6940R in Video Wall or Splitter layouts both video ports will display video. Video wall only supports Share, View Only and Occupy access modes.
Location Use the drop-down	n menu to select a location for the VideoWall or leave it as All Devices. See Location, page 220, for details.
Group Login When enabled	, users logging into or out of 1 receiver automatically logs into or out of all other receivers within the Video Wall, using the same set of credentials.
Item Description
Boundless Switching Enable this feature to allow you to switch KVM control between different receivers by moving the mouse cursor across screen boundaries. This option is disabled by default.When Boundless Switching is enabled, make sure to disable the following settings:◆ On the computer, under Control Panel - Mouse Properties - Pointer Options, uncheck Enhance pointer precision.◆ On the CCKM Main page, click Settings (page 269), then on the General tab scroll down and disable Fast Switching.Note:◆ Dual Display Transmitters can be set up as two independent Virtual Transmitters with Boundless Switching. The placement of the KE6940 setup must have DVI-1 as the main display on the left and DVI-2 as a secondary display on the right.Boundless Switching supports both single and dual video outputs from any one computer.◆ For multi-display PCs, make sure of the following:1. All video outputs are aligned in a row with top alignment and the main screen on the far left.2. The transmitter's port OS has been properly set, see page 224.3. Users can optionally group all video outputs from the same PC into a transmitter group. See p. 237.◆ If the mouse cursor disappears under a Linux operating system, execute this command:gsettings set org.gnome.setting-daemon.plugins.cursor active false
	Use the slide bar to zoom in or out for a better view of the Video Wall layout.
	Click this icon to reset the zoom back to full size.
	Select multiple display icons and click the Group button to group the displays into one screen.
	Select a group and click Ungroup to ungroup the displays.
Fit Mode Select how the video wall will be displayed:Height: Fits the video to the height of the display.Width: Fits the video to the width of the display.Scale: Fits the video on the entire display.
Item Description
	Use the RX OSD button to enable/disable showing the Receiver's name and IP address in the top left corner of the connected display. This helps identify which Receiver is connected to the display.
Save Click Save to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Receiver Permissions

Receiver Permissions sets which users and groups can access a Receiver. Select a device under the Receiver List, and then click under Operation to grant a user or group permission to access the device. This will allow the user to login to the Receiver's OSD menu to access the Connections tab.

To set Receiver Permissions, in Receiver settings, click

ATEN KE6910 - Receiver Permissions - 1

ATEN KE6910 - Receiver Permissions - 2

text_image

Set Receiver Permissions Receiver List KE6900R71 KE6940R70 KE8950R72 User testtest1 Harry Select All Unselect All ✓ Operation Group Inherited Permission Granted No Permission CANCEL APPLY

Item Description
Receiver List Lists the Receivers which can be selected to set permissions.
Drop-Down Menu	Use the drop-down menu to selectUser or Group. After making a selection, the list of users or groups appears. Set permissions by selecting the Operation box next to each user or group.
Operation Click the Operation	box next to each user or group toapply access rights on the selected device. This gives users and groups permission to log in to the Receiver's OSD. If a user inherits its permissions from a group, the box will be Blue. To disable access rights for all users, uncheck the box in the heading.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

Switch

Click Switch in the System Status panel to open the settings. On this page you can edit and delete Network Switches added to the CCKM (for adding switches, see Adding Network Switches, page 207).

ATEN KE6910 - Switch - 1

text_image

Transmitter Receiver Switch Account Profile Log Active Offline All Devices + ES0152-QA_11-sh1111111... ES0152P_173

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let you view and configure Network Switches.

Active refers to a Network Switch connection that is online.
- Offline refers to a Network Switch connection that is offline.
All Devices ▼ Use this drop-down menu to filter Network Switches by location. Use Locations to limit the Switches seen on the page.

- Click to add a new Location.
Select a Switch and click the Move to icon to add devices to a Location.
✗ Select a Location from the drop-down menu and click this icon to delete it.
Select a Location and click this icon to change the name.

Click to delete selected Network Switches.

Click to search for Network Switches.
Click to filter Network Switches shown on the page.
Click to switch between Grid View and List View.

Network Switch Configuration

When Network Switches are added to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, they appear on the Switch settings page. Double-click a Network Switch to configure its settings.

Optionally click Re-sync parameters to automatically update the Network Switch by enabling IGMP Snooping, IGMP Querier, Fast Leave, Unregistered Multicast Flooding, Flow Control, and Speed Mode (Auto for Port 1-48 / 10 Gbps FDX for Port 49-52).

ATEN KE6910 - Network Switch Configuration - 1

text_image

Switch Configuration General Port Configuration Basic Device Name ES0152P_173 Description 52-Port GbE PoE Managed Swl Location Unallocated SNMP Agent Settings SNMP Version ○V1 ○V2 ○V3 NMS IP / Host Name 10.0 50.173 Port 161 Community / User Name private Timeout 3000 Milliseconds Detect interval 60 Seconds CANCEL SAVE

Item Description
Basic Device Name: Enter a name for the Network Switch.




SNMP Agent Settings	SNMP Version: Select the version of the SNMP used.NMS IP / Host Name: Defines the IP address or the host name of the Network Switch.Port: Defines the port value of the Network Switch.Community / Username: Specifies the SNMP community of the Network Switch.Timeout: Defines timeout threshold in which the Network Switch's connection is reestablished.Detect Interval: Defines the interval in which the connection of the Network Switch is checked for.

Port Configuration

The Port Configuration tab sets the speed mode of each port of the Network Switch.

ATEN KE6910 - Port Configuration - 1

text_image

Switch Configuration Re-sync parameters General Port Configuration Port Speed Mode ^ <> ✓ 1 Auto ✓ 2 Auto ✓ 3 Auto ✓ 4 Auto ✓ 5 Disabled 6 Auto 7 10Mbps HDX 8 10Mbps FDX 9 100Mbps HDX 10 100Mbps FDX 11 1Gbps FDX 12 Auto ✓ 10 Auto ✓ 11 Auto ✓ CANCEL SAVE

Click Save to finish.

Account

Click Users in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Account page allows you to add, delete and configure users and groups. Instructions for adding users and groups is provide on page 256.

ATEN KE6910 - Account - 1

text_image

Transmitter Receiver User Account Profile Log Users Group Name Type Status OSD Language Description Group Brett Super User Active English Harry Super User Active English Testtest Administrator Active English administrator Administrator Active English testtest1 Super User Active Japanese

The Users and Group buttons appear at the top of the page.
Depending on the item selected, either Users or Groups are listed on the page.
The sort order of the information displayed can be changed by clicking the column headings.
Three icons in the right corner are used to add users, groups and set permissions, as explained in the sections that follow.

Users

The KVM over IP Matrix Manager supports three types of accounts, shown in the table below:

User Type Role
Administrator Access, push/pull and management of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, including configuration and setting up of devices. Manage Users, Groups, Transmitters, Receivers, Profiles and Video Walls. Configure personal working environments.
Super User Access and push/pull Receivers, Transmitters and Profiles they have been given permission for.
User Access Receivers to connect to Transmitters they have been given permission for.

Adding Users

To add a user, do the following:

Click on the menu bar.
Select Add New User. The Add New User window opens:

ATEN KE6910 - Adding Users - 1

text_image

Add New User Username Password Confirm Password Description Type Administrator Buper User Users Status Active Disable OSD Language English Toolbar Hotkey [Ctrl][Ctrl] Logout Timeout min (1-180) Disable Screen Blanker min(1-30) Disable OSD Title Bar Duration 10 sec(3-100) Disable Welcome Message Enable Username Group Select CANCEL SAVE

Enter the required information in the fields provided. A description of each is given in the table below:

Field Description
Username From 1 to 3	2 characters are allowed depending on the Account Policy settings.
Local User	Check the Local User box if the account is for logging in to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager or a Receiver.Uncheck the Local User box if the account is authenticated with a 3rd party external source, such as RADIUS, LDAP/AD, or TACACS+. See ANMS, page 276 for details.
Password From 6 to 3	2 characters are allowed depending on the Account Policy settings.
Confirm Password To	be sure there is no mistake in the password, you are asked to enter it again. The two entries must match.
Description Additional	information about the user that you may wish to include.
Type There are three	account categories: Administrator, Super User and User.The Administrators have full access to make changes within the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, which includes adding and removing Transmitters, Receivers, accounts, preferences, and configuration settings.The Super Users have access to the Receiver's OSD menu and can connect Channels and Profiles.The Users can log in to Receivers to connect channels.
Status	Status allows you to control the user's account and access, as follows:Active provides the user with access and permissions as granted.Disable lets you suspend a user's account without actually deleting it, so that it can be easily reinstated in the future.
OSD Language Click	the drop-down menu to select the language you want to use during OSD sessions for this user. Options are: Chinese (Traditional), Simplified Chinese, Japanese, German, Korean, Russian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese.
Toolbar Hotkey Select	the hotkey combination to call the Tool Bar function for this user. The Tool Bar is used when accessing the computer from the Transmitter or Receiver side.
Logout Timeout If there	is no user input for the amount of time set with this function, the user is automatically logged out. A login is necessary before the KVM over IP Matrix Manager can be accessed again. The default is 30 minutes.
Screen Blanker Set how	how many minutes the device waits when a session is idle before turning off the display.
OSD Title Bar Duration	When the accessing a port, the top left-hand corner will show a title bar displaying the access mode and the device name.Select how long you wish the title bar is to be displayed for, or check Disable to not show any title bar.
Welcome Message If you want the Welcome Message to appear on screen when the user logs into the KVM over IP Matrix Manager, select Enable.If you want the user's Screen Name to appear with the Welcome Message, check the Username check box.
Group Click Select and check a box to add the user to a group.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

When your selections have been made click Apply.
When the Operation Succeeded message appears, click OK.
The new user appears on the main panel.

- The columns show the Username; User Level, Status, OSD Language, Description; and Group.

Modifying Users

To modify a user, do the following:

In the main panel, double-click the user's name.
In the Edit User page that comes up, make your changes, then click Apply.

Deleting Users

To delete a user, do the following:

In the main panel, check the box next to the user's name.
Click .
Click OK.

Groups

Groups allow administrators to easily and efficiently manage users and devices. Since device access rights apply to anyone who is a member of the group, administrators need only set them once for the group, instead of having to set them for each user individually. Multiple groups can be defined to allow some users access to specific devices, while restricting other users from accessing them. Device permissions are discussed on page 261.

Adding Groups

To create a group, do the following:

Click Group on the Account page.
Click + and then select Add New Group. The Add New Group window opens:

ATEN KE6910 - Adding Groups - 1

text_image

Add New Group Group Name Description Member Edit CANCEL APPLY

Enter the required information in the appropriate fields. A description of each of the fields is given in the table below:

Field Description
Group Name A maximum of	32 characters is allowed.
Description Additional information about the user that you may wish to include. A maximum of 32 characters is allowed.
Member Lists the users that are currently in the group. To add users, click the Edit button.

At this point you can assign users to the group by clicking Edit.
When your selections have been made click Apply.
When the Operation Succeeded message appears, click OK.
The new group appears in the main panel.

- The columns show the Group Name, Description and Members that are in the group.

Repeat the above procedure to add additional groups.

Modifying Groups

To modify a group, do the following:

In the main panel, double-click the group's name.
Make your changes, then click Apply.

Deleting Groups

To delete a group, do the following:

In the main panel, check the box next to the group's name.
Click .
Click OK.

Permissions

You can assign Transmitter, Receiver and Profile permissions for users and groups from the Account page.

Assigning Device Permissions

To assign permissions for a user or group from the Account page, do the following:

Click 🎨 on the menu bar. The Set User Permissions window opens:

ATEN KE6910 - Assigning Device Permissions - 1

bar

Set User Perminions | User List | Transmitters ✓ | Group Inherited | View | Share | Group By | User By | Exclusive | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | KE6900T-1 | All | | | | | | | | KE6900T-2 | All | | | | | | | | KE6900T-3 | All | | | | | | | | KE6900T-4 | All | | | | | | | | KE6900T-5 | All | | | | | | | | KE6900T-6 | All | | | | | | | | KE6900T-7 | All | | | | | | | | KE6900T-8 | All | | | | | | | | KE6900T-9 | All | | | | | | | CANCE OK

To set the permissions, select a user or group, then a device and select the Access Type under each column so that it turns green. Make your permission settings for each user or group on each device according to the information provided below:

Item Description
User List	Use the radio button to view the Users or Group list. Click a user or group to configure their permissions.
Drop-Down Menu	Use the drop-down menu to select Transmitter, Receiver or Profile. After making a selection, a list of devices or profiles appears. Set permissions by selecting the access type (All, View, Share, Occupy, Exclusive) next to the device.
Access Type Select the access you want to grant to a user or group by clicking under the heading(s) next to each device. This defines how the device can be accessed by the user or group. When granted, the access types (All, View, Occupy, Exclusive) for Transmitters will appear available for the user in the Receiver's OSD Connection page (see page 179).All: Select to grant all access permissions, View, Share, Occupy and Exclusive, to the users or user groups.View: User can only view the remote screen, and cannot perform operations on it.Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input from the users is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.Occupy: The first user to access the Transmitter has control. However, additional users may view the Transmitter's video. If the user who controls the Transmitter is inactive for longer than the time set in the Transmitter's Timeout box, control is transferred to the first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.Exclusive: The first user to access the Transmitter has exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other users can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function does not apply when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.Operation (Receiver and Profile): The Operation access type for Receivers allows users to log into Receivers, and for Profiles allows a user to connect the Profile from a Receiver.
Apply Click Apply to save the changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit without saving.

When you have finished making your choices, click Apply.
In the confirmation popup that appears, click OK.

Profile

Click Profile in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Profile page allows you to create, run and schedule connection profiles. Profiles channel specific Receiver to Transmitter connections and can be instantly connected from the Profile page at anytime. Profiles can be also scheduled to run automatically at specific times.

ATEN KE6910 - Profile - 1

text_image

Transmitter Receiver User Account Profile Log Profile Schedule Name Description Access Mode Login Check Lock CSD ✓ Profile1 Share No No ☐ Profile2 Share No No ☐ Profile3 Share No No

The meanings of the icons and headings on the page are straightforward and let you view and configure Profiles.

Click to connect the selected Profile.
- Click to disconnect the selected Profile.
Click to delete the selected Profile.
- + Click to Create Profile or Create Schedule (page 264 & 267).
- Click and enter text to search for a Profile.
Check the box next to a Profile and click the Connect or Disconnect icon to start/stop profile connections. Check the box next to a Schedule and click the Enable or Disable icon to enable/disable a schedule.
- Appears on the Schedule page, click to enable the selected schedule.
- Appears on the Schedule page, click to disable the selected schedule.

Adding a Profile

Creating a Profile allows you to quickly connect single or multiple Receiver to Transmitter connections.

To add a Profile, do the following:

On the Profile page click + and then select Create Profile. The Create Profile window appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Adding a Profile - 1

text_image

Create Profile Name Description Permissions Select Access Mode Share Occopy Extensive View Only Login Clock Lock OSD Require Receivers to have a user logged in before connecting Lock OSD when connecting Location All Devices KE6900R... KE6900R KE6940R... KE6940R KE8950R... KESS50R Location All Devices Transmitter List KE6940T67 KE694 KE6940T1 KE694 KE6900ST KE690... KE8950T61 KE695... VirtualTX VirtualTX TransMI2 VirtualTX CANCEL SAVE

Item Description
Name Enter a name for the Profile.
Description Enter a description for the Profile.
Permissions	Click Select and check the box of the users / groups you want to allow to connect this Profile. When the user logs into a Receiver, the profile will appear listed in the OSD menu on the Profile page (see page 184), allowing them to connect it.
Item Description
Access Mode This defines how the Transmitter in a Profile can be accessed by Receivers when multiple users attempt to access it.View Only: Receivers only have view access to the Transmitter's video display.Share: All users accessing the Transmitter can simultaneously share control of the Transmitter. Input from the users is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.Occupy: Set a time threshold for Receivers whose Access Mode has been set to Occupy If there is no activity from the Receiver occupying the port for the amount of time set here, the Receiver is timed out and the port is released. The first Receiver to send keyboard or mouse input after the port has been released gets to occupy the port. Input a value from 1 to 240 seconds.Exclusive: The first Receiver to access the Transmitter has exclusive control over the Transmitter. No other users can view the Transmitter. The Timeout function does not apply to Transmitters which have this setting.
Login Check Check this box	to require a user to be logged in to the Receiver before a Profile can connect it to a Transmitter. When enabled, a user must be logged into the Receiver or it will not connect to the Transmitter when the Profile is initiated.
Lock OSD Checking this box	will lock the Receiver's OSD screen when the Profile connects it to a Transmitter.
Location Use the drop-down	menu to select a location to filter the Receivers displayed on the page.
	Click this icon to show individual Receivers.
	Click this icon to show only video wall Receivers.
	Click this icon to show only Receiver Group Receivers.
Save Click to save the changes.
Cancel Click to exit without saving.

After filling in the information, click a Receiver, select Select TX and use the drop-down menu select a Transmitter; or use Transmitter List at the bottom of the page to drag-and-drop Transmitters to Receivers to create the connection.
After configuring the connections, click Save. The new Profile appears on the Profile page.
To connect Profiles, check the box of the Profile(s) you want to connect, and click 📄
To disconnect Profiles, click .

Adding a Schedule

Creating a Schedule allows you to connect Profiles at specific dates, times and intervals.

To add a Schedule, do the following:

On the Profile page click

Schedule

Click + and then select Create Schedule. The Create Schedule window appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Adding a Schedule - 1

text_image

Create Schedule Profile Select Profile Frequency Once Start Date 2018/2/15 End Date 2018/2/15 Start Time AM 00 : 00 Disable End Time AM 00 : 00 Disable CANCEL SAVE

Item Description
Profile Use the drop-down menu to select a Profile to schedule.
Frequency Use the drop-down menu to select how often the Profile should run: Once, Daily, Weekly and Monthly.When you select Weekly/Monthly an additional drop-down menu appears to select the Week Day/Month Day on which the profile will run.
Start Date Enter the date on which you want the schedule to begin running.
End Date Enter the date on which you want the schedule to stop running.
Start Time Enter the time of day that you want the profile to connect.
End Time Enter the time of day that you want the profile to disconnect.
Every	If you select Daily, Monthly or Weekly, the Every option appears allowing you to enter how often you want the schedule to run. For example, enter 3 months if you want the profile to run once every three months. If you want to run the schedule once a day, once a week or once a month, use the default entry of 1.

After the schedule is configured, click Save.

Log

Click Log in the System Status panel to open the settings. The Log page lists events that take place and provides a breakdown of the time, user, severity, device, and log information. You can change the sort order of the display by clicking on the column headings.

ATEN KE6910 - Log - 1

text_image

Transmitter All logs All Device All User Time Log Information Information 2017/08/24 10:20:16 Session terminated normally(Sessionid=**********bam0). Information Brett 2017/08/24 10:20:16 User logout(username=Brett). Information 2017/08/24 09:46:37 Session created(Sessionid=**********bam0) from ip 192.168.0.71. Information Brett 2017/08/24 09:46:37 User login succeeded(username=Brett). Information Brett 2017/08/23 22:51:14 User logout(username=Brett). Information 2017/08/23 22:51:14 Session terminated normally(Sessionid=**********9vnc) Information KE6940R70 administrator 2017/08/23 22:33:08 Connection VIAUS to channel KE8950T61[0010748D0123000] established. Warning 2017/08/23 22:21:07 Session killed(Sessionid=**********amp0) Information 2017/08/23 22:21:07 Session created(Sessionid=**********9vnc) from ip 192.168.0.71. Information Brett 2017/08/23 22:21:07 User login succeeded(username=Brett). Information Brett 2017/08/23 22:21:07 Session created(Sessionid=**********wmp0) from ip 192.168.0.71. Information Brett 2017/08/23 22:21:07 User login succeeded(username=Brett). Information 2017/08/23 22:15:36 Session created(Sessionid=**********ts26) from ip 192.168.0.70. Information Administrator 2017/08/23 22:15:36 User login succeeded(username=administrator)

- Click the drop-down menu beside a heading to filter events into subcategories. Selecting a subcategory allows you to view only the logs that relate to the choice. The meanings of the headings at the top of the page are straightforward:

All Severity refers to the event's severity type: Information, Error, or Warning
All Device refers to the Transmitter or Receiver that relates to the event. If no device is listed the event refers to the KVM over IP Matrix Manager.
All User refers to the username that the event relates to. If no username appears, the event is general system information.
Time refers to the date and time that the event occurred.
Log Information provides detailed information about each event.

Click to delete the logs currently displayed in the list.
Click and enter text to search for an event log.
Click to save the log contents to a file on your computer.

Click to open a pop-up window that allows you to set how many days or the number of records to record before over-writing old log files. Use the radio button to select By Period (Days) or By Records and enter the number to use before overwriting the oldest log files.

Overview

The System Settings are accessed by clicking from the System Status page (see System Status, page 217). There are 7 tabs to configure the KE Manager system settings: General, ANMS, FW Upgrade, Redundancy, Backup/Restore, Certificates, and Sessions.

General

Clicking ☐ from the system status page opens the General tab, as shown below:

ATEN KE6910 - General - 1

text_image

Basic K2 Matrix Manager Version 9.2.217 (2021-04-08 26:22) CCDCVFAEPEF/CAIP 1882T, CCDCVFI FOS160FAD2CSP3 Hardware Version Serial Number K2 Matrix Manager Name K2 Matrix Manager Description Enable engineering mode Language English Keeper Enable Disable CCKM Timeout sum(1-180) Disable Authentication Lock seconds(20-99990) Disable Defaultless Switching Plus second(0-30) Always Push/Pull Login Check Enable Disable Network Ports HTTP Port 4000 HTTP Port 4400 Device Port 2100 Fast Switching Fast Switching Creates Delete Account Policy Device Password History Double Advance Password Rate after in IP exclude activate CLI Mode CLI Logit Create Delete Receiver Login Setting Affordance Logit OFFOR List Affordance Logit User EOID Mode EOID Mode Customized Edit Connection Redundancy Conversion Redundancy Enable Enable Pop-up Alert Pop-up Alert OK S11199 Disable Javaclient/Winclient Login access priority: Share Options

Heading Item Description
Basic KE Manager Version This provides the version of the KE Manager software.
Serial Number This provides the serial number and a link to upgrade the software.
KE Manager Name Enter a name for the KE Manager.
Description Enter a description for the KE Manager.
Language		Select the language for the KE Manager. Choices are: English, Chinese (Traditional), Simplified Chinese, Japanese, German, Korean, Russian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese.
Beeper Select Enable		to sound a beep from the Transmitter/Receiver every time a configuration change is made.
CCKM Timeout If there is no user input for the amount of time entered in the box, a user logged into the CCKM is automatically logged out. Check Disable to turn this function off.
Authentication Lock When a temporary disconnection happens, this function allows the user to retain his/her settings upon resuming connection within the time threshold set. The user keeps the same authentication and display.◆ Uncheck Disable to turn this function on.◆ Specify a time (in seconds) you wish to keep the authentication and display for.When disabled or if enabled but after the time threshold set, the user is prompted to be authenticated upon resuming the connection.
Boundless Switching Focus		When using Boundless Switching(see Boundless Switching, page 250) across multiple receivers within a receiver group or video wall, a colored border is shown on the receiver display currently being accessed (focus receiver).◆ Uncheck Always to only display the colored border for a set time interval immediately after switching the focus receiver.◆ Specify a time (in seconds) you wish to display the colored border for upon switching the focus receiver.
Push / Pull Login Check		Enable to check the access rights of the users receiving transmitter sessions upon push / pull.
Heading Item Description
Network Ports	HTTP Port Sets the HT	HTTP service port used to access the KE Manager. This is the port number to use for a browser login. The default is 8080.
	Device Port Sets the D	Device service port used to access the KE Manager. Configure this port number on the Transmitter and Receiver to access to the KE Manager software (see Manager Address, page 163 and 170). The default is 9110.
	HTTPS Port Sets the H	HTTPS service port used to access the KE Manager. This is the port number to use for a secure browser login. The default is 8443.Example: To access the KE Manager with an IP address of 192.168.0.100 using a secure browser login, enter: https://192.168.0.100:8443
Fast Switching Select the default res		solution to use so that you can switch faster when changing Receiver to Transmitter connections. If the monitor you are using does not support fast switching the video may not display correctly when this setting is enabled.Note: Make sure to disable Boundless Switching when Fast Switching is enabled.
Account Policy	Enforce Password History	This setting determines the number of unique new passwords that must be used before an old password can be reused. Uncheck the box and enter a number to enforce the password history policy.
	Enhance Password Rule	Select Enable to enforce rules for creating passwords, as follows:◆ The password length must be at least 8 charac- ters.◆ The password must contain both upper and lowercase characters.◆ The password must contain a number (0 through 9).◆ If a user types in the wrong password 5 times consecutively, their account will be locked out for 10 minutes.
CLI Mode CLI Mode Login Use the		radio button to Enable or Disable command line interface logins to the KE Manager.Warning: If Disable CLI Mode Login is selected, anybody can login via Telnet with administrator privileges without needing to authenticate, allowing control of the entire installation. For installations requiring a high level of security, it's recommended that Enable CLI Mode Login be applied.
Receiver Login Settings	Anonymous Login Use	this to anonymously login a user at select Receivers. This option allows users to access the Receiver and connect to Transmitters without needing to login.ClickDevice Listto display the list and check the box next to the Receiver(s) to enable theAnonymous Login feature.
	Anonymous Login User	WhenAnonymous Login (above) is enabled for Receivers, select a user from the drop-down menu to use as the default account to anonymously login to the Receiver.
EDID Mode	EDID Mode Use this drop-down menu to set the default EDID mode for all Transmitters. To set a different EDID mode for each Transmitter, use the drop-down menu to selectCustomizedand then clickEdit.A Transmitter list will appear with drop-down menus to configure each device's EDID mode.
Connection Redundancy Use this drop-down menu to set connection redundancy function. You can set up priority connection with this function.Please refer to Connection Redundancy below.
Pop-up Alert		Enable and clickEditto select the types of events to automatically trigger and display a pop-up message.
JavaClient / WinClient For AiT models only, click and drag to rearrange the login priorities of the different access modes, among Share, Occupy, View Only, and Exclusive. See Login Access Priority (AiT Models only), page 275 for details.
Save Click to save the changes.
Cancel Click to cancel the changes.

Connection Redundancy

You can set up priority connection for receivers. When a transmitter becomes inaccessible (such as signal loss or malfunction), this function allows the receiver to connect to the transmitter of the highest priority that is available.

Follow the steps below to setup the priority list.

Click Enable to enable this function.
Click Edit. A window will pop-up to allow editing.

ATEN KE6910 - Connection Redundancy - 1

text_image

System Setting Connection Redundancy Alarm Sound Enable Disable Priority List Available TX Added > Add > < Remove Target RX New Delete Selected TX CANCEL SAVE Copyright (c) 2018 ATEN International Co., Ltd.

For Alarm Sound, click Enable.

ATEN KE6910 - Connection Redundancy - 2

text_image

Alarm Sound ● Enable ● Disable

To create a new list, click New. A Priority List 1 will be shown. (Click New again to create another list.)

ATEN KE6910 - Connection Redundancy - 3

text_image

Connection Redundancy Alarm Sound Enable Disable Priority List Priority List 1 Available TX KE6910T1 KE6910T2 Add > < Remove Target RX New Delete Selected TX CANCEL SAVE

Select the transmitters you wish to be in the list from the "Available TX" list and click Add. The added transmitter will be shifted to the "Selected TX" list.

ATEN KE6910 - Connection Redundancy - 4

text_image

Connection Redundancy Alarm Sound Enable Disable Priority List Priority List 1 Available TX KE6910T1 Add > Remove Target RX New Delete Selected TX KE6910T2 CANCEL SAVE

To deselect the transmitter, click to select the transmitter from the "Selected TX" list and click Remove. The transmitter will be shifted back to the "Available TX" list.

Select a target receiver by first clicking the drop-down menu "Target RX", and select a receiver.

ATEN KE6910 - Connection Redundancy - 5

text_image

Connection Redundancy Alarm Sound Enable Disable Priority List Priority List 1 Available TX KE6910T1 Add > < Remove Selected TX KE6910T2 Target RX New Delete KE6912R CANCEL SAVE

Repeat steps 4-6 to add more priority lists.
Click Save to save the settings.

If your system includes an AiT device, “JavaClient/WinClient” (for remote viewer) will appear at the bottom of the General tab to let you select the login access priority depending on the user.

ATEN KE6910 - Login Access Priority (AiT Models only) - 1

text_image

Javaclient / Winclient Login access priority 1 Share 2 Occupy 3 View only 4 Exclusive

Share: User has full control and can simultaneously share control of the remote viewer. Input from the users is placed in a queue and executed chronologically.

Occupy: The first user to access the remote viewer has control. However, additional users may view the remote viewer. If the user controlling the remote viewer is inactive for longer than the time set in the Transmitter's Timeout box, control is transferred to the first user to move the mouse or strike the keyboard.

View only: User can only view the remote viewer but cannot perform operations on it.

Exclusive: The first user to access the remote viewer has exclusive control. No other users can view the remote viewer. The Timeout function does not apply when Transmitters are accessed with this setting.

ANMS

The ANMS (Advanced Network Management Settings) tab is used to set up login authentication and authorization management from external sources, and SNMP configurations. It is organized into three pages, as described below.

Event Destination

ATEN KE6910 - Event Destination - 1

text_image

General ANMS 3014 Redundancy 586 721 901 901 027 Event Destination 252 Authentication & Authorization 208 SBMP Settings 208 Enable report from the following SMTP Server Log Level Information SBMP Server SMTP Port 35 Server requires authentication Account Name Password From To 208 Syslog Settings 208 Enable Log Level Information Server IP Service Port 35 514 365 SAVE CANCEL

- SMTP Settings

To have the KE Manager email reports from the SMTP server to you, do the following:

Enable the Enable report from the following SMTP Server, select the Log Level (Information, Warning, or Error), and key in the SMTP Server IP address and SMTP Port.

Note: The SMTP server used can either be TLS-encrypted or unencrypted. CCKM shall send TLS-encrypted or unencrypted

email reports depending on the type of the SMTP server connected.

If your server requires authentication, check the Server requires authentication checkbox, and key in the appropriate information for the Account Name and Password fields.
Key in the email address of where the report is being sent from in the From field.

Note: 1. Only one email address is allowed in the From field, and it cannot exceed 64 Bytes.

1 Byte = 1 English alphanumeric character.
Key in the email address (addresses) of where you want the SMTP reports sent to in the To field.

Note: If you are sending the report to more than one email address, separate the addresses with a semicolon. The total cannot exceed 256 Bytes.

Click Save.
Once set, an SMTP report will be sent to the recipients for every 100 logs accumulated or once every 30 minutes.
An immediate SMTP report will also be sent whenever an error log occurs.

♦ Syslog Settings

To record all the events that take place on the KE Manager and write them to a Syslog server, do the following:

Check Enable.
Use the drop-down menu to select the Log Level (Information, Warning, or Error).
Key in the Server IP address of the Syslog server.
Key in the Service Port number. The valid port range is 1-65535.
Click Save.

Authentication & Authorization

ATEN KE6910 - Authentication & Authorization - 1

text_image

General ANMS FW Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions Event Destination Authentication & Authorization Enable Preferred RADIUS Server Preferred RADIUS Server Port 1812 Alternate RADIUS Server Alternate RADIUS Server Port 1645 Timeout 3 Retries 3 Shared Secret (at least 6 characters)

♦ RADIUS Settings

To allow authentication and authorization through a RADIUS server, do the following:

Check Enable.
Fill in the IP addresses and service port of the Preferred RADIUS Server and Alternate RADIUS Server.
In the Timeout field, set the time in seconds that the KE Manager waits for a RADIUS server reply before it times out.
In the Retries field, set the number of allowed retries.
In the Shared Secret field, key in the character string that you want to use for authentication between the KE Manager and the RADIUS Server. A minimum of 6 characters is required.
On the RADIUS server, Users can be authenticated with any of the following methods:
Use the same Username on both the RADIUS server and the KE Manager.
Use the same Group name on both the RADIUS server and the KE Manager.
Use the same Username/Group name on both the RADIUS server and the KE Manager.

In each case, the user's access rights are the ones assigned that were assigned when the User or Group was created on the KE Manager.

♦ LDAP / AD Settings:

ATEN KE6910 - Authentication & Authorization - 2

text_image

LDAP / AD Settings Enable Enable SSL Preferred LDAP Server Preferred LDAP Server Port 389 Alternate LDAP Server Alternate LDAP Server Port 389 Timeout 10 Admin DN Admin Name Password Search DN

To allow authentication and authorization for the KE Manager via LDAP / AD, refer to the information in the table, below:

Item Action
Enable Put a check in the Enable checkbox to allow LDAP / AD authentication and authorization.
Enable SSL Put a check in the Enable checkbox to allow SSL connections.
LDAP Server IP and Port	Fill in the IP address and port number for the LDAP / AD server.♦ You can use the IPv4 address, the IPv6 address or the domain name in the LDAP Server field.♦ For LDAP, the default port number is 389.
Timeout Set the time	in seconds that the KE Manager waits for an LDAP / AD server reply before it times out.
Admin DN Consult the	LDAP / AD administrator to ascertain the appropriate entry for this field. For example, the entry might look like this:ou=kn4132,dc=aten,dc=com
Admin Name Key in	the LDAP administrator's username.
Password Key in the	LDAP administrator's password.
Search DN Set the	distinguished name of the search base. This is the domain name where the search starts for user names.

On the LDAP / AD server, Users can be authenticated with any of the following methods:

- With MS Active Directory schema.

Note: If this method is used, the LDAP schema for MS Active Directory must be extended. Without schema – Only the Usernames used on the KE Manager are matched to the names on the LDAP / AD server. User privileges are the same as the ones configured in the KE Manager.

Without schema – Only the Usernames used on the KE Manager are matched to the names on the LDAP server. User privileges are the same as the ones configured in the KE Manager software.
Without schema – Only Groups in AD are matched. User privileges are the ones configured for the groups he belongs to in the KE Manager.
Without schema – Usernames and Groups in AD are matched. User privileges are the ones configured for the User and the Groups in the KE Manager.

♦ TACACS+ Settings:

ATEN KE6910 - Authentication & Authorization - 3

text_image

▼ TACACS+ Settings Enable Preferred TACACS+ Server Preferred TACACS+ Server Port 49 Shared Secret (at least 6 characters) Alternate TACACS+ Server Alternate TACACS+ Server Port 49 Shared Secret (at least 6 characters)

- Enable TACACS+ and enter the following information:

Preferred TACACS+ Server
Preferred TACACS+ Service Port
Shared Secret 1
Alternate TACACS+ Server
Alternate TACACS+ Service Port
Shared Secret 2

SNMP

ATEN KE6910 - SNMP - 1

text_image

Advertisement & Authentication SNMP SNMP Trap Enable Disable Server IP Port Notification 0 items Select SNMP Agent Enable Disable Add Now Delete Community / User Name NMS IP / Host Name Version Access Type Administrator 10.0.92.87 V1 Read + Write Administrator 10.0.92.87 V3 Read + Write Administrator 10.0.92.87 V3 Read + Write Cancel

- SNMP Trap & SNMP Agent

To be notified of SNMP trap events, do the following:

Check Enable SNMP Trap.
Enter the Server IP and the Port of the PC / server to be notified of SNMP trap events.
Next to Notification, click Select and check the types of events for sending SNMP notifications.
Check Enable SNMP Agent.
Check / uncheck the SNMP Agents for sending SNMP trap events.

To add additional SNMP Agents, you must first Disable SNMP Agent.

Click Save.

FW Upgrade

In FW Upgrade all KE devices that are online are listed, allowing you to select which devices get upgraded. New firmware versions can be downloaded from our website as they become available. Check the website regularly to find the latest upgrade packages.

To upgrade the firmware do the following:

Go to our website and download the firmware upgrade package appropriate to your KE device.
Open your browser and log in to the KE Manager with an administrator's account.
Click the Settings icon; select the FW Upgrade tab, the FW Upgrade page appears:

☐	Type ☐	Device Name ☐	Model ☐	IP ☐	FW Version ☐
☐	Transmitter	40T-win71-d12	KE6900ST	10.0.92.145	9.2.916
☐	Receiver	00R_4	KE6950R	10.0.92.140	9.2.916
☐	Transmitter	Win7-3	KE6950T	10.0.92.141	1.3.121
☐	Transmitter	40T-win71-d12	KE6900ST	10.0.92.145	5.2.916
☐	Receiver	00R_4	KE6950R	10.0.92.140	5.2.916

All the devices that are capable of being upgraded are listed.

Note: Only online devices show up in the list. Offline devices do not get upgraded.

Check the checkbox in front of the devices you want to upgrade. Uncheck the devices that you do not want to upgrade.
Click Browse. Navigate to the directory where the firmware upgrade file is located and select it.
Enable or disable Check FW Version

- If you enabled Check FW Version the current firmware level is compared with that of the upgrade file. If the current version is equal to

or higher than the upgrade version, a popup message appears, to inform you of the situation and stops the upgrade procedure.

If you didn't enable Check FW Version, the upgrade file is installed without checking what its level is.
If you cancel the firmware upgrade, you have to wait 12 seconds before you can disable Check FW Version and restart the firmware upgrade.
Click Upgrade to start the upgrade procedure. As the upgrade proceeds, progress information is shown on the screen. Once the upgrade completes successfully, the devices will reset.
Log in to each device and check the firmware version to be sure it is the new one.

Firmware Upgrade Recovery

Power off the KE device.
Press the Reset button, then power on the KE device while holding Reset.
Hold Reset for 7 seconds after the device is powered on.
The device will revert to a previous firmware version and recover from the failure.
Upgrade the firmware to the most current version available.

Redundancy

The Redundancy tab allows you to set up a backup computer in case the computer hosting the KE Manager goes offline. If the KE Manager goes offline, the secondary computer will automatically take over operations, allowing all connections to continue without disruption – with only a brief period of 30 seconds when new connections can't be started. When the primary computer comes back online it retrieves the updated database from the secondary computer and re-takes all KE Manager operations.

A CCKM supports up to 5 secondary servers.

To set up Redundancy, do the following:

Install KE Manager on a secondary computer with a USB license key. For detailed instructions, see page 191.

Note: A second USB license key is required if you have more than 8 KE Series devices in your setup.

On the secondary computer, log in to the KE Manager, click and go to the Redundancy tab.

ATEN KE6910 - Redundancy - 1

text_image

General ANMS FW Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions Mode ○ Primary ● Secondary Server ID Server Status Database Status ✓ Enable Redundancy Primary Server IP SAVE CANCEL

Check Enable Redundancy and select the Secondary radio button.
Use the Primary Server IP drop-down menu to select the primary IP address.
Click Save.
Redundancy is now running on the secondary computer.
On the primary computer, log in to the KE Manager, click 📄 and go to the Redundancy tab.

ATEN KE6910 - Redundancy - 2

text_image

General ANMS FW Upgrade Redundancy Backup Restore Certificates Sessions Mode Primary Secondary Server ID 708BCD7FD11E0000 Server Status Working Database Status -- Enable Redundancy Secondary Server IP 10.0.70.98 Username Password

Check Enable Redundancy and select the Primary radio button.
Use the Secondary Server IP drop-down menu to select the secondary IP address.
Enter the Username and Password of the secondary computer's local administrator account.
Click Save.
Information about the Redundancy status can be found in the event log (see Log, page 268 for details).

Backup / Restore

The Backup/Restore tab is divided into three panels: Backup, Restore, and Export Device List:

ATEN KE6910 - Backup / Restore - 1

text_image

General ANMS FW Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions ▼ Backup BACKUP Add Password ▼ Restore Click to browse backup file... RESTORE Password ▼ Export Device List EXPORT

The operations to perform backup/restore procedures are described in the table below and in the section that follows:

Procedure Operation
Backup Backs up	theKE Manager configuration – including profile and schedule configurations, user and group accounts, user profiles, logs, and system settings.
Restore Deletes	the current profile and schedule configurations, user and group accounts, user profiles, logs, and system settings; then restores those settings to the values that exist in the previously saved backup file.
Export Device List	Clicking Export allows you to save a file with a complete list of the devices added to the KE Manager. The file contains the ID, name, description and IP address of each transmitter and receiver. An Existing column also lists if the device is available: Yes, it exists and is available, or No, it is offline or has been removed.

Backup

To back up system configuration settings, do the following:

(Optional) In the Backup panel, check Add Password, and provide a password for the backup file.

Note: Providing a password is a security feature – if you provide a password, you will need to give the same password in order to restore the configuration settings from this file.

Click Backup.
In the dialog box that comes up, Click Save to save the configuration file (System.conf) to a location on your hard disk.
Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file and click Save.

Restore

To restore system configuration settings, do the following:

In the Restore panel, click Browse.
Navigate to the directory where the backup file is located and select it.
When you return to the Backup/Restore page enter the password you set when the backup file was created.

Note: If you did not set a password for the file, leave the field blank.

Click Restore.
Click OK to confirm that you want to restore the configuration data. When the Restore procedure is in process, a message stating that the KE Manager will restart will appear. After a short while the KE Manager closes and refreshes at the log in screen. When it comes back up the configuration settings that were restored from the backup file are in effect.

Certificates

This tab provides information about Private Certificates:

ATEN KE6910 - Certificates - 1

text_image

General ANMS FW Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions Issued To Common Name (CN) ATEN INTERNATIONAL CO.,LTD Organization (O) ATEN INTERNATIONAL CO.,LTD Organization Unit (OU) R&D Country (C) TW State or Province (ST) New Taipei City Locality (L) Sijih District Email Address (E) eservice@aten.com.tw Serial Number 00:30:50:A9:CA:7F:40:B5:3B Issued By Common Name (CN) ATEN INTERNATIONAL CO.,LTD Organization (O) ATEN INTERNATIONAL CO.,LTD Organization Unit (OU) R&D Validity Issued On 2016/03/17 05:40:43 Expires On 2026/03/16 05:40:43 Fingerprints SHA1 Fingerprint EE:55.7F:72:13.B7.A9:40:00:32.E8.A0:AB.BC-9F:4B:C8:65:B5:A5 NEW GET CSR IMPORT RESTORE DEFAULT

Private Certificate

There are two methods for establishing your private certificate: generating a self-signed certificate; and importing a third-party certificate authority (CA) signed certificate.

- Generating a Self-Signed Certificate

- Obtaining a CA Signed SSL Server Certificate

For the greatest security, we recommend using a third party certificate authority (CA) signed certificate. To obtain a third party signed certificate,

go to a CA (Certificate Authority) website to apply for an SSL certificate. After the CA sends you the certificate and private encryption key, save them to a convenient location on your computer.

- Importing the Private Certificate

To import the private certificate, do the following:

Click Import from the bottom of the Private Certificate page, shown here:

ATEN KE6910 - Private Certificate - 1

text_image

NEW GET CSR IMPORT RESTORE DEFAULT

Click Browse to the right of Certificate Filename; and browse to where your certificate file is located; and select it.
Click Import to complete the procedure.

Note: Clicking Restore Defaults returns the device to using the default ATEN certificate.

Certificate Signing Request

The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) section provides an automated way of obtaining and installing a CA signed SSL server certificate.

To perform this operation do the following:

Click New. The following dialog box appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Certificate Signing Request - 1

text_image

New Certificate Country (2 letter code) State or Province (ST) Locality (L) Organization (O) Organization Unit (OU) Common Name (CN) Email Address (E) CANCEL CREATE

Fill in the form – with entries that are valid for your site – according to the example information in the following table:

Information Example
Country (2 letter code) TW
State or Province Taiwan
Information Example
Locality Taipei
Organization Your Company.	Ltd.
Organization Unit Tech Department
Common Name mycompany.com	Note: This must be the exact domain name of the site that you want the certificate to be valid for. If the site's domain name is www.mycompany.com, and you only specify mycompany.com, the certificate will not be valid.
Email Address administrator@yourcompany.com

After filling in the form (all fields are required), click Create.

A self-signed certificate based on the information you just provided is now stored on the KE Manager software.

Click Get CSR, and save the certificate file (csr.cer) to a convenient location on your computer.

This is the file that you give to the third party CA to apply for their signed SSL certificate.

After the CA sends you the certificate, save it to a convenient location on your computer. Click Import to locate the file; then click Import to store it on the KE Manager.

Note: When you upload the file, the KE Manager checks the file to make sure the specified information still matches. If it does, the file is accepted; if not, it is rejected.

If you want to remove the certificate (to replace it with a new one because of a domain name change, for example), simply click Restore Defaults.

Sessions

The Sessions tab shows all of the users that are logged into KE Manager and OSD sessions and provides information concerning the “who, where and when” of each session. This page also gives the administrator the option of forcing a user logout by selecting the user and clicking Kill Session next to each user.

ATEN KE6910 - Sessions - 1

text_image

General ANMS FW Upgrade Redundancy Backup/Restore Certificates Sessions Username User Type Service IP Login Time Last Access Operation autocli Administrator SDK 192.168.0.72 2017/08/23 22:31:14 2017/08/23 22:36:26 Kil Session Harry Super User OSD 192.168.0.71 2017/08/25 14:54:02 2017/08/25 14:54:02 Kil Session administrator Administrator HTTPS 192.168.0.11 2017/08/25 16:03:00 2017/08/25 16:03:14 Kil Session

◆ Username refers to the user that logged in to establish a session.
◆ User Type refers to the account type of the user.
- Service refers to how the user logged into their session – via KE Manager, Command Line, or OSD.
◆ IP refers to the IP address from which the user has logged in.
- Login Time refers to the date/time that the user logged into the session.
- Last Access refers to the last time the user session was active.
◆ Operation provides the Kill Session button to force a user logout.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 8 Connections

Overview

The Connections panel is found on the KVM over IP Matrix Manager main page, just below System Status. Connections provides a diagram of current Transmitter to Receiver connections. Before connections are established the panel appears blank, as shown below. To connect Receivers to Transmitters, use the Instant Link panel (page 209), or create a connection Profile (page 263).

When connections are made, clicking a device in the left column provides a way to view the connection, hovering the mouse cursor over the connection diagram in the right column allows you to disconnect the device, as explained in the sections that follows.

ATEN KE6910 - Overview - 1

text_image

CCKM KE Matrix Manager administrator Welcome to the KE Matrix System Status Transmitter Active Standby Offies Total 0 14 14 *** 9 Receiver Active Standby Offies Total 2 0 2 *** Switch Users Profile Log Online Idle Total Next Schedule Warning Error Information 1 8 3 None 212 58 449 *** Redundancy Status: Primary (Working) Connections TX-RX RX-TX Transmitter Receiver Units

Connections

When Receivers connect to Transmitters, they appear in the Connections panel. There are two columns – each lists either Transmitters or Receivers. The columns can be swapped by clicking the TX-RX or RX-TX button. Devices in the left column can be clicked to display their connection to devices, shown in the right column. Connections, shown in the right column, can be disconnected by clicking the X over the connection diagram.

ATEN KE6910 - Connections - 1

flowchart

graph TD
    A["KE6040T67"] --> B["Receiver"]
    C["KE8950T61"] --> B
    D["KE6940T64"] --> B
    E["KE6940T60"] --> B
    B --> F["KE-6900R71"]
    B --> G["KE-6950R72"]
    F --> H["administrator (share)"]
    G --> I["administrator (Occupy)"]

Item Description
	On the heading bar under Connections, click this icon to change the sort order of the Transmitters or Receivers listed in the left column.
Left Column Click a device in	the left column to view its connection in the right column. A diagram to its connected device(s) appears in the right column.
Right Column The right column	displays a connection diagram when a device in the left column is selected. Move the mouse cursor over the diagram and click X to disconnect the devices. This column also shows the user and access type (Exclusive, Occupy, Share, View Only) used to establish the connection.
Transmitter Lists Transmitters	that are online and connected to Receivers.
Receiver Lists Receivers that	are online and connected to Transmitters.
	Click to view Transmitter to Receiver connections. This will list Transmitters in the left column so that they can be selected to view their connection diagram, shown in the right column.
	Click to view Receiver to Transmitter connections. This will list Receivers in the left column so that they can be selected to view their connection diagram, shown in the right column.
	Click this icon to Refresh the Transmitters and Receivers list in Connections panel.
Undo Click this icon to undo	the most recent disconnection.

Based on the different access types, users attempting to connect to device ports that are already being accessed by another user may or may not be able to connect. See the table below for scenarios where users are granted (O) or denied access (X).

New ConnectAttemptCurrentlyConnected	Exclusive Share Occupy View		Only
EXCLUSIVE	X	X	X	X
Share X O X O
Occupy X X O O
View Only X O O O
N	o	n	e	O

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Overview

The Scheduled Profile panel is found on the KVM over IP Matrix Manager main page, just below Connections. Scheduled Profiles displays connection profiles that have been scheduled. Click Go to Schedule to edit and create profile schedules (page 263). To create Profiles, see page 264.

ATEN KE6910 - Overview - 1

text_image

CCKM KE Matrix Manager Welcome to the KE Matrix Manager 1 4 3 Profile2 2days l... 359 9 2... Redundancy Status: [Primary] [Working] Connections TX-RX RX-TX Receiver Transmitter Scheduled Profile Go to Schedule Profile Description Start End Status Profile2 2017-09-01 01:00 2017-09-01 04:00 2days later Profile1 2017-10-10 05:10 2017-10-13 06:45 41days later Instant Link Copyright (c) 2016 ATEN International Co., Ltd.

Item Description
Headings	The headings provide the schedules: Name, Description, Start, End, and Status. Start and End show the time/date the profile is scheduled to begin and end. Status displays the number of days until to the next scheduled run.
Go to Schedule	Clicking Go to Schedule opens the Profile settings page which allows you to create and edit connection profiles. See Profile, page 263 for details.
	Click this icon to Refresh the connections list in the right column.
Undo Click this icon to undo	the most recent disconnection.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 10 Sessions

Overview

The Sessions panel is found at the bottom of the KVM over IP Matrix Manager main page, just below Scheduled Profile. Sessions displays information about users logged into devices and the KVM over IP Matrix Manager web GUI. Click Go to Sessions to view the settings page (see page 291).

ATEN KE6910 - Overview - 1

text_image

CCKM KE Matrix Manager Welcome to the KE Matrix Manager Scheduled Profile Go to Schedule Profile Description Start End Status Profile2 Profile1 2017-03-01 01:00 2017-03-01 04:00 2days later 2017-10-10 05:10 2017-10-13 06:45 4 days later Session User Level Service IP Login Time Last Access Operation Breit Super User OSD 192.168.0.71 2017/08/29 17:16 2017/08/29 17:16 Kill Session Administrator Administrator HTTPS 192.168.0.11 2017/08/29 17:17 2017/08/29 17:18 Kill Session Jessy Administrator OSD 192.168.0.72 2017/08/29 17:18 2017/08/29 17:18 Kill Session Instant Link Copyright (c) 2016 ATEN International Co., Ltd.

Item Description
Headings The headings provide information about each user session:Username,User Level,Service,IP,Login Time, andLast Access. For more details about each heading, see Sessions, page 291.
Go to Sessions	Clicking Go to Sessions opens the Sessions settings page which provides a page displaying the same information found in this panel.
	Click this icon to Refresh the Sessions list.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Overview

The KE Link App is a mobile app that allows users to access the CCKM server from an iPad for convenient remote monitoring and management.

Requirements

Before using KE Link app, make sure your iPad meets the following requirements:

Running iPadOS 9.0 or later
Has KE (Instant) Link app installed, available from the App Store.
Connected to the same network as the CCKM server.

IMPORTANT: To use KE Link, the CCKM server's license must be activated.

Accessing CCKM

On the KE Link app, enter the IP address and service port value of the CCKM server, and tap Connect, as exemplified below.

ATEN KE6910 - Accessing CCKM - 1

text_image

KE Matrix System Instant link CCKM IP ADDRESS 192 . 168 . 10 . 3 PORT 8443 Connect

The account selection page appears, displaying all of the CCKM server's user accounts. Select the user account you want to use for accessing the CCKM server. Upon selecting, you must enter the password of the account and tap Login.

ATEN KE6910 - Accessing CCKM - 2

text_image

Change CCKM IP Alfred Sim Administrator Harry Weng User Suzuki Chen Superuser Login

Once successfully logged in, the KE Link app's main page appears, resembling the CCKM server's Instant Link function, as exemplified below.

ATEN KE6910 - Accessing CCKM - 3

text_image

KE Matrix System Instant link Active Stand-by Off-line RECEIVER Single Group Share Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex Name Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex None Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Notes Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note Rex Note

Monitoring

Adjusting Preview Size

For easy monitoring, users can tap 1 of the 3 following icons to display the preview of transmitters and/or receivers in small, medium, or large images, as described below.

Preview Size Description
Large		Displays the previews of the transmitters / receivers in large images (2 per row)
Medium		Displays the previews of the transmitters / receivers in medium images (4 per row)
Small		Displays the previews of the transmitters / receivers in small images (6 per row)

Searching for a Device

To search for a particular transmitter and/or receiver device, simply enter the name or IP address of the transmitter and/or receiver you want to search for and tap the search icon.

ATEN KE6910 - Searching for a Device - 1

text_image

KE Matrix System Instant link Active Stand-by Off-line ATEN RECEIVER Single Group Share RX Name RX Name TRANSMITTER Single Group

Checking a Receiver's Tx-Connection

To check which transmitter a receiver is currently connected to, simply long-tap that receiver until the name of the transmitter or Tx group it is connected to is displayed, as exemplified below.

ATEN KE6910 - Checking a Receiver's Tx-Connection - 1

text_image

RECEIVER TX Name Disconnect

You can optionally disconnect the receiver from the transmitter by tapping Disconnect.

If no transmitter is currently connected, No connection is displayed, as exemplified below.

ATEN KE6910 - Checking a Receiver's Tx-Connection - 2

text_image

No connection. Disconnect RX Name

Connecting Tx-Rx

To connect a transmitter or Tx group to the desired receiver or Rx group, do the following:

First, select the access privilege you want the receiver to control the transmitter with from the following drop-down list.

ATEN KE6910 - Connecting Tx-Rx - 1

text_image

KE Matrix System Instant link Active Stand-by Off-line CEIVER Single Group Share RX Name RX Name

Tap and drag the desired transmitter device or Tx group to the desired receiver or Rx group, as illustrated below.

ATEN KE6910 - Connecting Tx-Rx - 2

text_image

RECEIVER Single Group Share RX Name RX Name per Daisy Chain UI RX Name RX Name RX Name RX Name RX Name RX Name RX Name RX Name RX Name RX Name TRANSMITTER Single Group TX Name TX Name per Daisy Chain UI TX Name TX Name

Access Types

New ConnectAttemptCurrentlyConnected	Exclusive Share Occupy View		Only
EXCLUSIVE	X	X	X	X
Share X O X O
Occupy X X O O
View Only X O O O
N	o	n	e	O

Logout

To log out of the user account, currently used to access the CCKM server, tap Menu and then tap Log out.

ATEN KE6910 - Logout - 1

text_image

KE Matrix System Instant link RECEIVER APP Version V1.000.23.4 CCKM IP 192.10.1.2 Log out

Remote Viewer (AiT Models only)

Introduction

If the video source(s) of your AiT model is connected, the remote viewer can be used to access these video source(s) as if it were your local system.

A window will be presented and the remote server is displayed inside this window.

You can maximize the window, drag the borders to resize the window and use the scrollbars to move around the screen.
Due to net lag, there might be a slight delay before your keystrokes show up. You may also have to wait a bit for the remote mouse to catch up to your local mouse before you click.
Due to net lag, or insufficient computing power on the local machine, some images, especially motion images, may display poorly.

There are several ways you can access the remote servers and are listed below:

Windows viewer accessed directly from the web browser GUI.
Java viewer accessed directly from the web browser GUI.
Windows Client Viewer AP (without browser). On the browser login page, a “Download Windows Client AP” is available. Refer to The Windows/Java Client AP on page 310 for more information.
Java Client Viewer AP (without browser). Since the control is identical to the windows client viewer, refer to The Control Panel on page 313 on the control of the viewer interface.

Note: Audio is not supported when the AiT models are accessed via WinClient and JavaClient.

Windows and Java Client Viewer (web access)

The Windows and Java Client Viewer is accessible via a web browser.

ATEN KE6910 - Windows and Java Client Viewer (web access) - 1

text_image

At the login screen of the Remote Viewer page, enter the username/password and click Login. You can change the login language by using the language drop-down menu.

A second or two after, the video source(s)' display appears as a window on your desktop:

ATEN KE6910 - Windows and Java Client Viewer (web access) - 2

text_image

No signal. | 1

The control/access is laid out in the control panel. Refer to The Control Panel on page 313 for access/control information.

By default, if you use Internet Explorer as your browser, the Windows Client viewer is used. If you use other browsers, the Java Client viewer is used.

If you manually set the preference to Java Client when you use Internet Explorer as your browser, the Java Client viewer is also used.

The Windows/Java Client AP

Download

To download the stand-alone Windows or Java Client program, go to the browser login page and click the Download Windows Client AP or Download Java Client AP button.

ATEN KE6910 - Download - 1

text_image

Note: Make sure your system has JRE 6 Update 3 or later installed. Java is available for free download from Sun's Java web site (http://java.sun.com).

Starting Up

For the first time running the AP, right-click the Windows/Java Client AP and click “Run as administrator” to start.

The Client Connection Screen is shown below and each components are described in the table. Windows Client will be the example shown here.

ATEN KE6910 - Starting Up - 1

text_image

Windclient File Help Server List: Name IP Status KE6940AIT 10.3.41.182 (fe80::267d:4diff:fe-fb:4c78) Available Server IP: 10.3.41.182 Port: 9000 Connect Switch to remote view

Item Description
Server List	When you run the Client program, it automatically searches the user's local LAN segment for AiT units, and lists whichever ones it finds in this box. If you want to connect to one of these units, double-click to connect.
Server If the AiT unit you	wish to connect to is at a remote location, it will not be found on your LAN. You can enter its IP address and port yourself.If you don't know the Port number, contact the Administrator.When the IP address and Port number for the unit you wish to connect to have been specified, click Connect to start the connection.
Connect Starts connecting to the AiT unit.
Disconnect These buttons become active once you log into the AiT unit.
Switch to remote view
Message panel The blank field on the right of the Server section shows the current status of the server connection.

Double-click the unit. When the unit is connected, a login window appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Starting Up - 2

text_image

Provide a valid Username and Password and click OK to continue.

Note: The default Username is administrator and the default Password is password.

After you have successfully logged in, the connection screen reappears:

ATEN KE6910 - Starting Up - 3

text_image

Winclient File Help Server List: Name IP Status KE6940AIT 10.3.41.182 (fe80::267d:4diff:fe4b:4c78) Available Server IP: 10.3.41.182 Port: 9000 Server is ready. Network disconnect. Server is ready. Disconnect Switch to remote view

At this time there are two active buttons and are described in the table below:

Button Action
Disconnect Breaks	the connection to the unit.
Switch to remote view	Opens a window on the user's desktop containing the remote server's display that is the same as the one that appears with the browser-based Windows client.

Click Switch to remote view to access the video source(s)' display(s).

Refer to The Control Panel on page 313 for information about the remote access interface.

The Control Panel

The control panel is hidden at the upper or lower center of the screen (the default is up). It becomes visible when you move the mouse pointer over it:

ATEN KE6910 - The Control Panel - 1

text_image

No signal. | 1

Note: 1. The above image shows the complete Control Panel. The icons that appear can be customized. See Control Panel Configuration, page 328, for details.

To move the Control Panel to a different location, click and drag the Control Panel.

◆ The panel is consisted of two rows.
- The second row shows the video resolution of the remote display, the bus the user is on, and an information button where you can click it for a menu-style version of the control panel toolbar (see below).
- Right clicking the second row area also brings up the menu-style control panel. This menu allows you to select options for the Screen Mode, Zoom, Mouse Pointer type, and Mouse Sync Mode. These functions are discussed in the sections that follow.

ATEN KE6910 - The Control Panel - 2

text_image

Video Settings Screen Mode Snapshot Set To Grayscale Zoom Ctrl+Alt+Del On-screen Keyboard Mouse Pointer Mouse Sync Mode Hotkeys Virtual Media Customize Control Panel About Exit

Control Panel Functions

The Control Panel functions are described in the table below.

Icon Function
			This is a toggle. Click to ping the Control Panel to the window where it is always displayed on top of other screen elements. Click again to have it display normally.
			Click to bring up the Video Options dialog box. (See Video Settings, page 318, for details).
			Toggles the display between Full Screen Mode and Windowed Mode.
			Click to take a snapshot (screen capture) of the remote display. To configure the Snapshot parameters, refer to Snapshot on page 329.
			Click to toggle the remote display between color and grayscale.
			Click to zoom the remote display window.Note: This feature is only available in windowed mode (Full Screen Mode is off). See Zoom, page 324 for details.
			Click to send a Ctrl+Alt+Del signal to the remote system.
			Click to bring up the on-screen keyboard (see The On-Screen Keyboard, page 325).
			Click to select the mouse pointer type.Note: This icon changes depending on which mouse pointer type is selected (see Mouse Pointer Type, page 326).
			Click to toggle Automatic or Manual mouse sync.◆ When the selection is Automatic, a green mark appears on the icon.◆ When the selection is Manual, a red mark appears on the icon.See Mouse DynaSync Mode, page 326 for a complete explanation of this feature.
Icon Function
			These icons show the Num Lock, Caps Lock, and Scroll Lock status of the remote computer.◆ When the lock state is On, the LED is bright orange.◆ When the lock state is Off, the LED is dull blue.Click on the icon to toggle the status.Note: These icons and your local keyboard icons are in sync. Clicking an icon causes the corresponding LED on your keyboard to change accordingly. Likewise, pressing a Lock key on your keyboard causes the icon's color to change accordingly.

















			Click to bring up the Macro dialog box (see Macros, page 316 for more details).

ATEN KE6910 - Control Panel Functions - 15

Macros

The Macros icon provides access to three functions found in the Macros dialog box: Hotkeys, User Macros, and System Macros. Each of these functions is described in the following sections.

Hotkeys

Various actions, corresponding to clicking the Control Panel icons, can be accomplished directly from the keyboard with hotkeys. Selecting the Hotkeys radio button lets you configure which hotkeys perform the actions. The actions are listed to the left; their hotkeys are shown to the right. Use the checkbox to the left of an action's name to enable or disable its hotkey.

ATEN KE6910 - Hotkeys - 1

text_image

Hotkeys ● Hotkeys Enable Actions Hotkeys ✓ Exit Remote Location F2,F3,F4. □ Adjust Video F5,F6,F7. □ Toggle Control Panel F3,F4,F5. □ Toggle Mouse Display F7,F8,F9. □ Adjust Mouse F8,F7,F6. □ Video AutoSync F6,F7,F8. □ Show/Hide Local Cursor F4,F5. □ Substitute Ctrl Key F11. ✓ Substitute Alt Key F12. Search ○ By Name ○ By Key Search Exit

If you find the default Hotkey combinations inconvenient, you can reconfigure them as follows:

Highlight an Action, then click Set Hotkey.
Press your selected Function keys (one at a time). The key names appear in the Hotkeys field as you press them.
You can use the same function keys for more than one action, as long as the key sequence is not the same.
To cancel setting a hotkey value, click Cancel; to clear an action's Hotkeys field, click Clear.
When you have finished keying in your sequence, click Save.

To reset all the hotkeys to their default values, click Reset.

An explanation of the Hotkey actions is given in the table below:

Action Explanation
Exit remote location	Exits the remote view. This is equivalent to clicking the Exit icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F2, F3, F4.
Adjust Video	Brings up the Video Settings dialog box. This is equivalent to clicking the Video Settings icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F5, F6, F7.
Toggle Control Panel	Toggles the Control Panel Off and On. The default keys are F3, F4, F5.
Toggle Mouse Display	If you find the display of the two mouse pointers (local and remote) to be confusing or annoying, you can use this function to shrink the non-functioning pointer down to a barely noticeable tiny circle, which can be ignored. Since this function is a toggle, use the hotkeys again to bring the mouse display back to its original configuration. This is equivalent to selecting the Dot pointer type from the Mouse Pointer icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F7, F8, F9.Note: The Java Control Panel does not have this feature.
Adjust mouse This synchronizes the local and remote mouse movements. The default keys are F8, F7, F6.
Video Auto-sync This combination performs an auto-sync operation. It is equivalent to clicking the Video Autosync icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F6, F7, F8.
Show/Hide Local Cursor	Toggles the display of your local mouse pointer off and on. This is equivalent to selecting the Null pointer type from the Mouse Pointer icon on the Control Panel. The default keys are F4,F5.
Substitute Ctrl key If your local computer captures Ctrl key combinations, preventing them from being sent to the remote system, you can implement their effects on the remote system by specifying a function key to substitute for the Ctrl key. If you substitute the F11 key, for example, pressing [F11 + 5] would appear to the remote system as [Ctrl + 5]. The default key is F11.
Substitute Alt key Although all other keyboard input is captured and sent to the remote system, [Alt + Tab] and [Ctrl + Alt + Del] work on your local computer. In order to implement their effects on the remote system, another key may be substituted for the Alt key. If you substitute the F12 key, for example, you would use [F12 + Tab] and [Ctrl + F12 + Del]. The default key is F12.

ATEN KE6910 - Hotkeys - 2

Video Settings

The Video Settings dialog box allows you to adjust the placement and picture quality of the remote screen display on your monitor.

ATEN KE6910 - Video Settings - 1

text_image

Video Settings Preset Custom Fair < Video Quality > Excellent Performance: Low 10M Etherent High OK Cancel Advanced>>

The adjustment options are as follows:

Option Usage
	Click this to control the transparency of the Video Settings dialog box.
Performance Select	the type of Internet connection that exists between the Local Client computer and the unit. The unit will use that selection to automatically adjust the Video Quality settings to optimize the quality of the video display.Since network conditions vary, if none of the preset choices seem to work well, you can select Customize and use the Video Quality slider bars to adjust the settings to suit your conditions.
Advanced See page	319 for details.

Gamma Adjustment

For greater control and if it is necessary to correct the gamma level for the remote video display, use the Gamma function of the Advanced Video Settings by clicking the Advanced button.

For gamma level, there are ten preset and four user-defined levels to choose from. Click the drop-down menu and choose the most suitable one.

ATEN KE6910 - Gamma Adjustment - 1

text_image

Video Settings Preset Custom Fair < Video Quality > Excellent Performance: Low 10M Etherent High RGB Red Gain: Green Gain: Blue Gain: Set To Grayscale Reset Min Max Video Quality: Enable Refresh Refresh every 10 seconds Transparency Low High Color depth control Enabled Low High OK Cancel Basic << Gamma Default x:000 y:131 Userdel 1 Save As Reset

The additional options in the Advanced screen are as follows:

Option Usage
RGB Drag the slider	bars to adjust the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) values. When an RGB value is increased, the RGB component of the image is correspondingly increased.If you enable Set to Grayscale, the remote video display is changed to grayscale.
Gamma This section	allows you to adjust the video display's gamma level.Click and drag the diagonal line at as many points as you wish to achieve the display output you desire.Click Save As to save up to four user-defined configurations derived from this method. Saved configurations can be recalled from the list box at a future time.Click Reset to abandon any changes and return the gamma line to its original diagonal position.
Video Quality	Drag the slider bar to adjust the overall video quality. The larger the value, the clearer the picture and the more video data goes through the network. Depending on the network bandwidth, a high value may adversely affect response time.
Enable Refresh The	unit can redraw the screen every 1 to 99 seconds, eliminating unwanted artifacts from the screen. Select Enable Refresh and enter a number from 1 through 99. The unit will redraw the screen at the interval you specify. This feature is disabled by default. Click to put a check mark in the box next to Enable Refresh to enable this feature.Note: 1. The switch starts counting the time interval when mouse movement stops.2. Enabling this feature increases the volume of video data transmitted over the network. The lower the number specified, the more often the video data is transmitted. Setting too low a value may adversely affect overall operating responsiveness.
Transparency	Drag the slider bars to adjust the transparency of the remote display.
Color Depth Control	This setting determines the richness of the video display by adjusting the amount of color information.

Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.

Click Cancel to abandon your changes and close the dialog box.

Note: For best results, change the gamma while viewing a remote computer.

ATEN KE6910 - Gamma Adjustment - 2

Virtual Media

The Virtual Media feature allows a drive, folder, image file, or removable disk on a local client computer to appear and act as if it were installed on the remote server.

Virtual Media also supports a smart card reader function that allows a reader plugged into a local client computer to appear as if it were plugged into the remote server.

Virtual Media Icons

The Virtual Media icon on the Control Panel changes to indicate whether the virtual media function is available, or if a virtual media device has already been mounted on the remote server, as shown in the table below:

Icon Function
	The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that the virtual media function is disabled or not available.
	The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that the virtual media function is available. Click the icon to bring up the virtual media dialog box.
	The icon displays as shown on the left to indicate that a virtual media device has been mounted on the remote server. Click the icon to unmount all redirected devices.

Virtual Media Redirection

To implement the virtual media redirection feature, do the following:

Click the Virtual Media icon to bring up the Virtual Media dialog box:

ATEN KE6910 - Virtual Media Redirection - 1

text_image

Virtual Media Control Write Mode Device Type Device Name/Path Disable High Speed USB Operation Mode Add Remove Mount Exit

Click Add and select the media source.

ATEN KE6910 - Virtual Media Redirection - 2

text_image

Drive ISO File Folder Disable High Add Remove Mou

Depending on your selection, additional dialog boxes appear enabling you to select the drive, file, folder, or removable disk you desire. See Virtual Media Support, page 427 for details about mounting these media types.

To add additional media sources, click Add, and select the source.

Up to three virtual media choices can be added. To rearrange the selection order, highlight the device you want to move, then click the Up or Down Arrow button to promote or demote it in the list.

Read refers to the redirected device being able to send data to the remote server. Write refers to the redirected device being able to have data from the remote server written to it. The default is Read. If you want the redirected device to be writable, check the Enable Write checkbox:

ATEN KE6910 - Virtual Media Redirection - 3

text_image

Virtual Media Control Write Mode Device Type Device Name/Path Enable Write Folder C:\Users\Documents\ Enable Write Drive D:\ Disable High Speed USB Operation Mode Add Remove Mount Exit

Note: 1. If a redirected device cannot be written to, or if a user does not have write permissions, it appears in gray and cannot be selected.

See Virtual Media Support, page 427, for a list of supported virtual media types.
To remove an entry from the list, highlight it and click Remove.
After you have made your media source selections, click Mount. The dialog box closes. The virtual media devices that you have selected are redirected to the remote system, where they show up as drives, files and folders on the remote system's file system.

ATEN KE6910 - Virtual Media Redirection - 4

text_image

My Computer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back Search Folders Address My Computer My Computer 3V6 Happy (A:) eSystemME (C:) eSystem2KAS (D:) STORAGE (E:) Compact Disc (F:) Removable Disk (G1) Control Panel Select an item to view its description Displays the files and folders on your computer See also: My Documents My Network Places Network and Dial-up Connections 7 object(s) My Computer

Once mounted, you can treat the virtual media as if they were really on the remote server – drag and drop files to/from them; open files on the remote system for editing and save them to the redirected media, etc.

Files that you save to the redirected media will actually be saved on your local system. Files that you drag from the redirected media will actually come from your local system.

To end the redirection, bring up the Control Panel and click on the Virtual Media icon. All mounted devices are automatically unmounted.

Smart Card Reader

Note: This feature is only available when using the WinClient Viewer or the Windows Client AP.

The smart card reader function allows a reader plugged into a local client computer's USB port to be redirected, and appear as if it were plugged into the remote server. One purpose of smart cards (Common Access Cards, for example), is to allow authentication to the remote server from the local client.

When a smart card reader is connected to the local client computer, an entry for it appears when you bring up the Virtual Media dialog box and click Add:

ATEN KE6910 - Smart Card Reader - 1

text_image

Drive ISO File Folder SmartCard Reader ▶ CardMan 6121 Static Driver CardMan 6121

Make your selection and click Mount to complete the redirection.

ATEN KE6910 - Smart Card Reader - 2

Zoom

The Zoom icon controls the zoom factor for the remote view window. Settings are as follows:

Setting Description
100% Sizes	and displays the remote view window at 100%.
75% Sizes	and displays the remote view window at 75%.
50% Sizes	and displays the remote view window at 50%.
25% Sizes	and displays the remote view window at 25%.
1:1 Sizes	and displays the remote view window at 100%. The difference between this setting and the 100% setting is that when the remote view window is resized its contents don’t resize – they remain at the size they were. To see any objects that are outside of the viewing area move the mouse to the window edge, to have the screen scroll.

ATEN KE6910 - Zoom - 1

The On-Screen Keyboard

The unit supports an on-screen keyboard, available in multiple

languages, with all the standard keys for each supported language.

Click this icon to pop up the on-screen keyboard:

ATEN KE6910 - The On-Screen Keyboard - 1

text_image

On-screen Keyboard Ctrl+Alt +Del Ctrl+Esc Alt +Tab PC English US Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 ~ ! 1 @ 2 # 3 $4 % 5 ^6 & 7 * 8 (9) 0 - + = ← Backspace Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P { [ ] } Enter Caps Lock A S D F G H J K L : : | Shift Z X C V B N M < , > ? / Shift Ctrl Win Key Alt Alt Win Key Menu Ctrl

One of the major advantages of the on-screen keyboard is that if the keyboard languages of the remote and local systems are not the same, you do not have to change the configuration settings for either system. The user just has to bring up the on-screen keyboard; select the language used by the computer on the port he is accessing; and use the on-screen keyboard to communicate with it.

Note: You must use your mouse to click on the keys. You cannot use your actual keyboard.

To change languages, do the following:

Click the down arrow next to the currently selected language to drop down the language list.

ATEN KE6910 - The On-Screen Keyboard - 2

text_image

On-screen Keyboard Ctrl+Alt +Del Ctrl+Esc Alt +Tab English US Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F ~ 1 @ 2 # 3 $4 % 5 ^6 & 7 * 8 (9) 0 Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P Caps Lock A S D F G H J K L Shift Z X C V B N M < > Ctrl Win Key Alt Alt Win Key Menu Ctrl

Select the new language from the list.

To display/hide the expanded keyboard keys, click the arrow to the right of the language list arrow.

ATEN KE6910 - The On-Screen Keyboard - 3

text_image

On-screen Keyboard Ctrl+Alt +Del Esc | F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) - + ← 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = Backspace Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P { } Enter Caps Lock A S D F G H J K L : ' | Shift ↑ Shift ↑ Set Win Key Alt Alt Win Key Menu Ctrl P:Sc SclK Brk Ins Home PgUp Num / * - 7 8 9 + Home ↑ PgUp + 4 5 6 → 1 2 3 Enter End ↓ PgDn ← ↓ → 0 Insert . Del

ATEN KE6910 - The On-Screen Keyboard - 4

Mouse Pointer Type

The CN9600 offers a number of mouse pointer options when working in the remote display. Click this icon to select the type that you would like to work with:

ATEN KE6910 - Mouse Pointer Type - 1

text_image

Dual Crosshairs Dot Single

Note: 1. The Dot pointer is not available with the Java Client Viewer or the Java Client AP.

Selecting the Single pointer has the same effect as the Toggle mouse display hotkey function (see Toggle Mouse Display, page 317 for details).
The icon on the Control Panel changes to match your choice.

ATEN KE6910 - Mouse Pointer Type - 2

Mouse DynaSync Mode

Clicking this icon selects whether synchronization of the local and remote mouse pointers is accomplished either automatically or manually.

The icon on the toolbar indicates the synchronization mode status as follows:

Icon Function
	The green mark on this icon indicates that Mouse DynaSync is available and is enabled. This is the default setting when Mouse DynaSync is available.
	The red mark on this icon indicates that Mouse DynaSync is available but is not enabled.

When Mouse DynaSync is available, clicking the icon toggles between enabled and disabled. If you choose to disable Mouse DynaSync mode, you must use the manual syncing procedures described in the next section.

Automatic Mouse Synchronization (DynaSync)

Mouse DynaSync provides automatic locked-in syncing of the remote and local mouse pointers – eliminating the need to constantly re-sync the two movements.

Manual Mouse Synchronization

If you are using Manual mouse synchronization instead of automatic DynaSync and the local mouse pointer goes out of sync with the remote system's mouse pointer, there are a number of methods to bring them back into sync:

Invoke the Adjust Mouse function with the Adjust Mouse hotkeys (see Adjust mouse, page 317, for details).
Move the pointer into all 4 corners of the screen (in any order).
Drag the Control Panel to a different position on the screen.
Set the mouse speed and acceleration for each problematic computer attached to the switch. See Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures, page 425, for instructions.

ATEN KE6910 - Manual Mouse Synchronization - 1

Control Panel Configuration

Clicking the Customize Control Panel icon brings up a dialog box that allows you to configure the items that appear on the Control Panel, as well as its graphical settings:

ATEN KE6910 - Control Panel Configuration - 1

text_image

Customize Control Panel Customize Control Panel ✓ Auto Hide ✓ Video Settings ✓ Screen Mode ✓ Snapshot ✓ Set To Grayscale ✓ Zoom ✓ Ctrl+Alt+Del ✓ On-screen Keyboard ✓ Mouse Pointer ✓ Mouse Sync Mode ✓ NumLock ✓ CapsLock ✓ ScrLock ✓ Hotkeys ✓ Virtual Media ✓ Customize Control Panel Control Panel Style ✓ Transparent ✓ Icon Screen Options ☐ Full Screen Mode ✓ Keep Screen Size Scrolling Method ● Mouse Movement ○ Scroll Bar User Info ☐ User Numbers Snapshot Path: C:\Users\terrynieh\Documents\To Me Browse Format JPEG Quality ○ BMP Lowest 100 Highest ● JPEG Keyboard Pass Through □ Enable Window Title Device Name(IP)/Resolution/Frame Rate/Bandwidth OK Cancel

The dialog box is organized into five main sections as described in the table below:

Item Description
Customize Control Panel	Allows you to select which icons are displayed in the Control Panel.
Control Panel Style	♦ Enabling Transparent makes the Control Panel semi-transparent, so that you can see through it to the display underneath.♦ Enabling Icon causes the Control Panel to display as an icon until you mouse over it. When you mouse over the icon, the full panel comes up.
Item Description
Screen Options	◆ If Full Screen Mode is enabled, the remote display fills the entire screen.◆ If Full Screen Mode is not enabled, the remote display appears as a window on the client desktop. If the remote screen is larger than what is able to fit in the window, scroll bars will appear.◆ If Keep Screen Size is enabled, the remote screen is not resized.◆ If the remote resolution is smaller than that of the client monitor, its display appears like a window centered on the screen.◆ If the remote resolution is larger than that of the client monitor, its display is scaled to the client monitor size.◆ If Keep Screen Size is not enabled, the remote screen is resized to fit the client monitor's resolution.
Scrolling Method	In cases where the remote screen display is larger than your monitor, you can choose how to scroll to the areas that are off-screen.◆ If you select Mouse Movement, the screen will scroll when you move the mouse pointer to your screen border.◆ If you select Scroll Bars, scroll bars appear around the screen borders that you can use to scroll to the off-screen areas.
User Info	If User Numbers is enabled, the total number of users logged into the unit displays beside the resolution on the second row of the Control Panel (See the Control Panel diagram on page 313 for an example.)
Snapshot These	settings let the user configure the unit's screen capture parameters (see the Snapshot description under The Control Panel, page 313):◆ Path lets you select a directory that the captured screens automatically get saved to. Click Browse; navigate to the directory of your choice; then click OK. If you don't specify a directory here, the snapshot is saved to your desktop.◆ Click a radio button to choose whether you want the captured screen to be saved as a BMP or a JPEG (JPG) file.◆ If you choose JPEG, you can select the quality of the captured file with the slider bar. The higher the quality, the better looking the image, but the larger the file size.
Keyboard Pass Through	When this is enabled, the Alt-Tab key press is passed to the remote server and affects that server. If it is not enabled, Alt-Tab acts on your local client computer.
Window Title Use	the drop-down menu to select which remote server information is displayed on the window title.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 13 Firmware Upgrade Utility

The Windows-based Firmware Upgrade Utility (FWUpgrade.exe) provides a smooth, automated process for upgrading the firmware. The Utility comes as part of a Firmware Upgrade Package that is specific for each device. New firmware upgrade packages are posted on our web site as new firmware revisions become available. Check the web site regularly to find the latest packages and information relating to them:

http://www.aten.com

For browser based firmware upgrade, please refer to FW Upgrade on page 282.

Preparation

From a computer that is not part of your installation go to our Internet support site and choose the model name that relates to your KE device to get a list of available Firmware Upgrade Packages.
Choose the Firmware Upgrade Package you want to install (usually the most recent), and download it to your computer.
Be sure that the computer is connected to the same LAN segment as the KE devices.

Starting the Upgrade

To upgrade your firmware:

Run the downloaded Firmware Upgrade Package file - either by double clicking the file icon, or by opening a command line and entering the full path to it. The Firmware Upgrade Utility Welcome screen appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Starting the Upgrade - 1

text_image

Firmware Upgrade Utility Welcome to the Firmware Upgrade Utility. Put your device into Firmware Upgrade Mode. Use the Firmware Upgrade Cable to connect its Firmware Upgrade Port in your computer (or connect via Ethernet). Agree to the License Agreement; Then Click Next. LICENSE AGREEMENT LICENSE GRANT A IEN International Co., Ltd. ("Licensor") wants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license to access and use FIRMWARE UPGRADE UTILITY (the "Product") during the "Term" set forth below. You may install the Product on a hard disk or other storage device; install and use the Product on a file server for use on a network for the purpose of (i) permanent installation onto hard disks or other storage devices or (ii) use of the Product over such network; and make backup copies of the Product. RESTRICTIONS You agree not to modify, adapt, translate, reverse engineer, recompile, discernible or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the Product, or create derivative works based on the Product, or remove any proprietary notices or labels on the Product, including copyright, trademark or patent pending notices. You may not sublicense the Product or otherwise allow others to use the Product licensed to you. • ] Agree ○ [ Don't Agree Help About < Back Next > Cancel

Note: The screens shown in this section are for reference only.

Read the License Agreement (enable the I Agree radio button).
Click Next. The Firmware Upgrade Utility main screen appears:

ATEN KE6910 - Starting the Upgrade - 2

text_image

Firmware Upgrade Utility If Check Firmware Version is checked, the utility compares the device's firmware level with the upgrade file. If the device's version to never, the utility let you decide whether to continue or not. If it is not checked, the utility performs the upgrade directly. Click Next to begin. Device List: Status Messages > Loading & testing files ... > Loading & testing files: OK > Searching for devices ... Device Description Check Firmware Version Progress... Help View Log < Back Next > Cancel

The Utility inspects your installation. All the devices capable of being upgraded by the package are listed in the Select Master Device list.

ATEN KE6910 - Starting the Upgrade - 3

text_image

If Check Firmware Version is checked, the utility compares the device's firmware level with the upgrade files. If the device's version is never, the utility lets you decide whether to continue or not. If it is not checked, the utility performs the upgrade directly. Click Next to begin Device List Select Master Device Master device list: KB690040R-s80135 KB690040R-s80132 KB690040T-s80135 KB690040T-s80110 More than one Master device has been found. Only one Master/leave device can be upgraded at a time. Please select one of the Master devices from the list OK Cancel Device Descriptio Check Firmware Version Program... Help View Log < Back Next > Cancel

After you have made your device selection, Click OK and then Next to begin the upgrade.

ATEN KE6910 - Starting the Upgrade - 4

text_image

If Check Firmware Version is checked, the utility compares the device's firmware level with the upgrade files. If the device's version is never, the utility lets you decide whether to continue or not. If it is not checked, the utility performs the upgrade directly. Click Next to begin. Device List KB6900/40R : 000 Device Description CPU : AM3352 Device F/W: Var 1.2.114 Upgrade F/W: Var 1.0.071 MID: 000 Status Messages: > Loading & testing files ... > Loading & testing files: OK > Searching for devices ... > Preparing firmware upgrade ... > Preparing firmware upgrade: OK > Upgrading device KB6900/40R : 0.0 Check Firmware Version Progress... Help View Log Back Next Cancel

If you enabled Check Firmware Version, the Utility compares the device's firmware level with that of the upgrade files. If it finds that the device's version is higher than the upgrade version, it brings up a dialog box informing you of the situation and gives you the option to Continue or Cancel.

If you didn't enable Check Firmware Version, the Utility installs the upgrade files without checking whether they are a higher level, or not.

As the Upgrade proceeds status messages appear in the Status Messages panel, and the progress toward completion is shown on the Progress bar.

Upgrade Succeeded

After the upgrade has completed, a screen appears to inform you that the procedure was successful:

ATEN KE6910 - Upgrade Succeeded - 1

text_image

Firmware Upgrade Utility The Firmware upgrade was successful. Click Finish to close the utility. Device List XB690D40R : 000 Status Messages • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... • The device is writing flash now, please wait ... Upgrading device XB690D40R : 000. CK > Firmware upgrade: OK Device Description CPU : AM3352 Device FWV: Ver 1.2.114 Upgrade FWV: Ver 1.0071 MID: 000 Check Firmware Version Progress... Help View Log

Firmware Upgrade Recovery

If the Upgrade Succeeded screen doesn't appear or the upgrade procedure is abnormally halted (due to computer crash, power failure, etc.), the device may become inoperable. If you find that the device does not work following a failed or interrupted upgrade, do the following 1. Power off the KE device. 2. Press the Reset button, then power on the KE device while holding Reset. 3. Hold Reset for 7 seconds after the device is powered on. 4. The device will revert to a previous firmware version and recover from the failure. 5. Upgrade the firmware to the most current version available. This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Serial Control Protocol Commands

The KE Series's built-in bi-directional RS-232 serial interface and LAN port connection allows system control via Receivers through a high-end controller or PC. This control feature can also be accessed via TCP/IP through a computer running Telnet. The port for Telnet commands should be set to 9130.

Configuring the Serial Port

The controller's serial port should be configured the same as the Receiver's default configuration, as shown below:

Baud Rate 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None

The Receiver's Function Switch should be set to RS-232 Config (see page 12). Before executing RS-232 commands across a network you must install the KVM over IP Matrix Manager on a computer and ensure that it is online. For the Slim Version of KE Series (KE8900ST/8900SR/9900ST). Please make sure the RS-232 Serial Port is not connected before executing commands. On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session. Please press "Enter" or "T/t" to start "CLI Session" or "Text Menu". ![](images/08e425ea1b3722a8366913b8a303b582fd986294c9ffcae215fd163aa5e873fa.jpg)

text_image

Welcome to ATEN KE8950 User Station Copyright(c) 2009-2013 ATEN International Co., Ltd. --Press ENTER to start CLI session --Press T/t to start TextMenu: Welcome to CLI mode USER NAME:administrator PASSWORD: #>

Device/Profile Commands

When typing a device or profile into a command string, you can enter the name by: IP address (device only), ID or @ with the List number for the device/profile in the command line interface. Note: To find out about the List number for a device/profile, execute a List command (page 354).

Telnet

The KE Series can be operated and configured via a remote terminal session using Telnet. This is a useful means for configuring devices when they are first setup and connected to the network. To log into the KE Series device by means of a Telnet session, do the following: 1. On your computer, open a terminal (command line) session. 2. At the prompt, key in the KE device's IP address with port 9130 in the following way: telnet [IP address] [port] 3. Press Enter. The login screen appears. At the login prompt, provide the Password. ![](images/a5502d842ac70fb04ee47d0a722bfa8483d611a1bad60e11374317f2757f5c81.jpg)

text_image

Welcome to CLI mode USER NAME:administrator PASSWORD:password #>

Verification

After sending a command, a verification message appears at the end of the command line. Use the echo command to identify a command by number: - Command OK - the command is correct and performed successfully - Command incorrect - the command has the wrong format and/or values. - Echo Command - at the end of a command string, type: e1234 – where 1234 can be any number. The verification message returns with the echo number.

Switch Port Command

The formula for Switch Port commands is as follows: Command + Output + Num1 + Input + Num2 + Mode + Stream + Connect + [Enter] 1. For example, if you want to switch the Receiver's connection to Transmitter (192.168.0.20), type the following: sw i192.168.0.20 [Enter] 2. For example, if you want to disconnect the Receiver from its Transmitter connections, type the following: sw off [Enter] 3. For example, if you want to connect Receiver (192.168.0.99) to Transmitter (192.168.0.79) with exclusive access to stream video and audio, type the following: sw o192.168.0.99 i192.168.0.79 exclusive video audio on [Enter] 4. For example, to disconnect Receiver (192.168.0.11) from the video stream and return it to the OSD menu, type the following: sw o192.168.0.11 off [Enter] 5. For example, to disconnect Receiver (192.168.0.09) from the video stream and logout the OSD, type the following: sw o192.168.0.09 logout [Enter] 6. For example, to disconnect the Receiver's USB stream, type the following: sw usb off [Enter] 7. For example, to switch the Receiver to the 5th Transmitter listed in the command line interface, type the following: sw i@5 exclusive all on [Enter] 8. For example, to switch the Receiver to the 7th Transmitter listed in the command line interface with echo command 4312, type the following: sw i@7 exclusive all on e4312 9. For example, to switch Receiver (192.168.0.12) to the 14th Transmitter listed in the command line interface with occupy access to stream video audio and USB, type the following: sw o192.168.0.12 i@14 occupy video audio usb on [Enter] The following tables show the possible values for the Switch Port commands:

Command Description
sw Switch port command

Output Description
o Output port command (RX)

Num1 Description
xx Output port	xx: Receiver ID or IP address
@zz List #	zz: 1~99To use the 4th Receiver listed in the command line interface,type: o@4

Input Description
i Input command (TX)

Num2 Description
yy Input port	yy: Transmitter ID or IP address
@zz List #	zz: 1~99To use the 8th Transmitter listed in the command line interface,type: i@8

Mode Description
exclusive Sets	the Access Mode to exclusive.
share Sets	the Access Mode to share.
occupy Sets	the Access Mode to occupy.
viewonly	Sets the Access Mode to view only. If the mode is omitted, view only is used by default.

Stream	Description
video	Sets the video source stream
audio	Sets the audio source stream
serial	Sets the serial source stream
Stream	Description
usb Sets the USB source stream
all Sets all source streams

Connect Description
on Connect
off Disconnect
logout Logout OSD

The following table lists the available Switch Port commands:

Command	Output	Num1	Input	Num2	Mode	Stream		Connect	Description
sw o xx	i yy	exclusive		video			audio serial usb all	on	Switch output xx to input yy with exclusive access to source(s).xx: Receiver IDyy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx	i yy share		video				audio serial usb all	on	Switch output xx to input yy with share access to stream source(s).xx: Receiver IDyy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx	i yy	occupy		video			audio serial usb all	on	Switch output xx to input yy with occupy access to stream source(s).xx: Receiver IDyy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx	i yy	viewonly		video			audio serial usb all	on	Switch output xx to input yy with viewonly access to stream source(s).xx: Receiver IDyy: Transmitter ID
sw o xx							off Switch output xx, disconnect streams, return to OSD menu.xx: Receiver ID
sw o xx						logout Switch output xx, disconnect streams and logout from OSD menu.xx: Receiver ID
sw						video audio serial usb all	off	Switch Receiver stream(s) to disconnect.
Command	Output	Num1	Input	Num2	Mode	Stream	Connect	Description
sw off Switch Receiver								disconnect streams, return to OSD menu.
sw i @zz exclusive					share occupy viewonly	video audio serial usb all	on Switch	Switch Receiver to input @zz with [mode] access to stream source(s). zz: Transmitter # by order listed in the command line interface.
sw o xx i @zz exclusive			video			audio serial usb all	on Switch	Switch output xx to input @zz with [mode] access to stream source(s). xx: Receiver ID zz: Transmitter # by order listed in command line interface.

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space. 2. The Mode command string can be skipped and view only will be used by default. 3. Skip the Output and Num1 command strings to configure the local Receiver.

Mute Command

The Mute command allows you to enable or disable the audio. The formula for the Mute command is as follows: $$ \text { Command } + \text { Output } + \text { Num1 } + \text { Control } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 1. For example, to turn mute off (audio on) for the Receiver, type the following: $$ \text { mute off } [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 2. For example, to turn mute on for Receiver (192.168.0.11), type the following: $$ \text { mute o192.168.0.11 on [Enter] } $$ 3. For example, to turn mute off for Receiver (192.168.0.18), type the following: $$ \text { mute o192.168.0.18 off [Enter] } $$ The following tables show the possible values for the Mute commands:

Command Description
mute Mute command

Output Description
o Output port command

Num1 Description
xx Output number



Control Description
on Mute on; audio disabled
off Mute off; audio enabled (default)

The following table lists the available Mute commands:

Command Output Num1 Control Description
mute	o	xx	on	Turn mute on for output xx xx: Receiver ID
mute	o	xx	off	Turn mute off for output xx xx: Receiver ID

Command Output Num1	Control Description
mute on Turn mute on for	Receiver
mute off Turn mute off for	Receiver

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space. 2. The Control command string can be skipped and off will be used by default. 3. Skip the Output and Num1 command strings to configure the local Receiver.

Profile Command

The Profile command allows you to connect profiles and video walls. The formula for Profile commands is as follows: $$ \text { Command } + \text { Profile } + \text { Num1 } + \text { Control } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 1. For example, to connect profile 8 and lock the OSD menu, type the following: $$ \text { profile f8 } [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 2. For example, to connect profile 4 with access to the OSD menu, type the following: $$ \text { profile f4 release [Enter] } $$ 3. For example, to disconnect profile 12 and return to the Receiver to the OSD menu, type the following: $$ \text { profile f12 back [Enter] } $$ The following tables show the possible values for the Profile commands:

Command Description
profile Profile command

Profile Description
f Profile ID

Num1 Description
xx Profile	or Video Wall ID
	xx: 1-99

Control Description
lock Connect profile, lock access to OSD menu (default)
release Connect profile, allow access to OSD menu
back Disconnect profile, return Receiver to OSD menu

The following table lists the available Profile commands:

Command	Profile	Num1	Control	Description
profile f xx lock Connect profile xx, lock				OSD accessxx:1~99
profile f xx release Connect profile xx, allow				OSD accessxx:1~99
profile f xx back		Disconnect profile xx		and return Receiver to OSD menuxx: 1~99

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space. 2. The Control command string can be skipped and lock will be used by default. 3. For functional lock and release commands, make sure the Lock OSD when connecting option is checked during Create Profile. Refer to Lock OSD, page 265 for more information.

EDID Command

Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is a data that contains a display's basic information and is used to communicate with the video source. The EDID commands allow you to change the EDID setting of a Transmitter. For more information on configuring EDID settings, see Properties, page 169. The formula for the EDID command is as follows: $$ \text { Command } + \text { Address } + \text { Number } + \text { Control } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 1. For example, if you want to configure device (192.168.0.3) to use the remix EDID mode, type the following: edid a192.168.0.3 remix [Enter] The following tables show the possible values for the EDID commands:

Command Description
edid EDID command

Address Description
a Address command

Number Description
xx Address number xx: Receiver ID or IP address

Control Description
auto Checks	the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays.
remix Manually checks the EDID of all connected displays and the ATEN default EDID to use the best common resolution for all displays (see EDID Mode, page 181).
default Implements ATEN's default EDID. (default)
manual Manually set the EDID configuration from the Receiver's OSD (see EDID Mode, page 181).

The following table lists the available EDID commands:

Command	Address	Number	Control	Enter	Description
edid a xx	auto [Enter]	Set EDID	of address	xx to auto.	xx: Device ID or IP Address
edid a xx	remix [Enter]	Set EDID	of address	xx to remix.	xx: Device ID or IP Address
edid a xx	default [Enter]	Set EDID	of address	xx to default.	xx: Device ID or IP Address
edid a xx	manual	[Enter]	Set EDID	of address	xx to manual.xx: Device ID or IP Address

Reset Command

The Reset command allows you to reset a device back to the default factory settings. Reset includes resetting the devices IP address. Note: The Reset command resets everything but the login information to the factory default settings. To reset the login information, refer to Reset All Information on page 409. The formula for the Reset command is as follows: $$ \text { Command } + \text { Address } + \text { Number } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 1. For example, to reset device (192.168.0.95), type the following: reset a192.168.0.95 [Enter] 2. For example, to reset the Receiver, type the following: reset [Enter] The following tables show the possible values for the Reset command:

Command Description
reset Reset command

Address Description
a Address command

Number Description
xx Address number

The following table lists the available Reset commands:

Command	Address	Num	Enter	Description
reset	a	xx	[Enter]	Reset address xx back to the factory default settingsxx: Device ID or IP Address
reset			[Enter]	Resets the Receiver settings

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space. 2. Skip the Address and Number command strings to reset the local Receiver.

RS-232 Command

The RS-232 command allows you to set the RS-232 settings for a device. The formula for the RS-232 command is as follows: $$ \begin{array}{l} \text {Command + Address + Number + Baud Rate + Parity + Data Bit +} \\ \text {Stop Bit + Flow Control [ Enter]} \end{array} $$ 1. For example, to set device (192.168.0.33) with a baud rate of 38400, parity of none, data bit of 8, and stop bit of 1, type the following: $$ \text { baud a192.168.0.33 38400 none 8 1 [Enter] } $$ 2. For example, to set the local device with a baud rate of 19200, type the following: $$ \text { baud 19200[Enter] } $$ The following tables show the possible values for the RS-232 command:

Command Description
baud RS-232 command

Address Description
a Address command

Num1 Description
xx Address number



Baud Rate Description
9600 Use 9600 baud rate
19200 Use 19200 baud rate
38400 Use 38400 baud rate
115200 Use 115200 baud rate

Parity Description
None Sets the parity to none
Even Sets the parity to even
Odd Sets the parity to odd

Data Bit	Description
5 Sets the data bit to 5
6 Sets the data bit to 6
Data Bit Description
7 Sets the data bit to 7
8 Sets the data bit to 8
Stop Bit Description
1 Sets the stop bit to 1
2 Sets the stop bit to 2
Flow Control Description
None Sets flow control to none
Hardware Sets flow control to hardware
Xon Sets flow control to Xon
Xoff Sets flow control to Xoff

The following table lists the available Baud Rate commands:

Command	Address	Num 1	Baud Rate	Parity	Data Bit	Stop Bit	Flow Control	Description
baud a	xx 9600	None		Even Odd	5678	12	None Hardware Xon/Xoff	Set address xx baud rate to 9600, with parity/ data bit/ stop bit / flow control setting
baud a	xx 19200	None		Even Odd	5678	12	None Hardware Xon/Xoff	Set address xx baud rate to 19200, with parity/ data bit/ stop bit / flow control setting
baud a	xx 38400	None		Even Odd	5678	12	None Hardware Xon/Xoff	Set address xx baud rate to 38400, with parity/ data bit/ stop bit / flow control setting
baud a	xx 115200	None		Even Odd	5678	12	None Hardware Xon/Xoff	Set address xx baud rate to 115200, with parity/ data bit/ stop bit / flow control setting
baud 9	600 Set local device							baud rate to 9600
baud 1	9200 Set local device							baud rate to 19200
baud 3	8400 Set local device							baud rate to 38400
baud 1	15200 Set local device							baud rate to 115200

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space. 2. The Baud Rate value is required but Parity, Data Bit and Stop Bit can be skipped and their setting will not change. 3. Skip the Address and Number command strings to configure the local device settings.

OSD Command

To enable or disable the On-Screen Display (OSD) menu for a Receiver, use the following command: $$ \text { Command } + \text { Output } + \text { Number } + \text { Control } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 1. For example, to enable the OSD for Receiver 192.168.0.51, type: osd o192.168.0.51 on [Enter] 2. For example, to disable the OSD for the local Receiver, type: osd off [Enter] The following tables show the possible values for the OSD command:

Command Description
osd OSD command

Output Description
o Output command

Number Description
xx Output number	xx: Receiver ID or IP address

Control Description
on Enable OSD functions
off Disable OSD functions (default)

The following table lists the available OSD commands:

Command	Output	Number	Control	Enter	Description
osd	o	xx	on	[Enter]	Enable OSD functions for output xxx: Receiver ID or IP address
osd	o	xx	off	[Enter]	Disable OSD functions for output xx off (default)xx: Receiver ID or IP address

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space. 2. Skip the Output and Number command strings to configure the local Receiver.

List Command

The List command allows you to retrieve information about users, settings and connections. The formula for the List command is as follows: $$ \text { Command } + \text { Output } + \text { Input } + \text { Number } + \text { Control [Enter] } $$ 1. For example, for a complete list of available channels, type the following: list channel [Enter] 2. For example, for a complete list of available profiles, type the following: list profile [Enter] 3. For example, to list all users logged into all OSD menus, type the following: 4. list login [Enter] 5. For example, to list the user logged into the OSD on Receiver (192.168.0.44), type the following: list o192.168.0.44 login [Enter] 6. For example, for a complete list of available connections, type the following: list connection [Enter] 7. For example, to list the current connections on Transmitter (192.168.0.88), type the following: list i192.168.0.88 connection [Enter] The following tables show the possible values for the List command:

Command Description
list List command

Output Description
o Output command

Input Description
i Input command

Number Description
xx Output or	Input numberxx: Device ID or IP address
Control Description
channel Lists information about the available channel(s)
profile Lists information about the available profile and TV wall connections
rx Lists information about the Receiver
login Lists information about users logged into to the OSD menu
connection Lists information about a Transmitters current connections

The following table lists the available List commands:

Command	Output	Input	Number	Control	Description
list o xx	login		List output xx user			logged into OSD.
list o xx	rx		List output xx Receiver			information
list			i	xx	connection	List input xxTransmitter information
list					channel	List all available channel information
list					profile	List all available profile information
list					rx	List information about all Receivers
list					login	List information about all OSD logins
list					connection	List information about all connections

Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space. 2. Skip the Output or Input and Number command strings to view the local Receiver.

Read Command

The Read command allows you to retrieve the properties of a device. The formula for the Read command is as follows: $$ \text { Command } + \text { Output } + \text { Input } + \text { Number } + \text { Control [Enter] } $$ 1. For example, to read all of the local Receiver's properties, type the following: $$ \text { read all } [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 2. For example, to read all of Receiver (192.168.0.19) device properties, type the following: $$ \text { read o192.168.0.19 all [Enter] } $$ 3. For example, to read all of Transmitter (192.168.0.28) device properties, type the following: $$ \text { read i192.168.0.28 all [Enter] } $$ 4. For example, to read the basic properties of Receiver (192.168.0.61), type the following: $$ \text { read o192.168.0.61 basic [Enter] } $$ 5. For example, to read the network properties of Transmitter (192.168.0.71), type the following: $$ \text { read i192.168.0.71 network [Enter] } $$ The following tables show the possible values for the Read command:

Command Description
read Read command

Output Description
o Output command

Input Description
i Input command

Number Description
xx Output or	Input number
	xx: Device ID or IP address

Control Description
all Read all device properties
Control	Description
basic Read basic properties
network Read network properties
ipsettings Read IP settings
rs232 Read RS232 properties
properties Read connection properties
manager Read KVM over IP Matrix Manager properties
streams Read enable media properties
tx Read source stream IP properties (Receiver)
usbmode Read USB mode properties (Receiver)
multicast Read multicast properties (Transmitter)
videoqtyadvanced Read advanced video properties (Transmitter)
ossettings Read OS properties (Transmitter)

The following table lists the available Read commands: Note: 1. Each command string can be separated with a space.

Command	Output	Input Number	Control	Description
read	o	i	xx	all	Read output or input xx all device properties xx: Device ID or IP address
read	o	i	xx	basic	Read output or input xx basic properties xx: Device ID or IP address
read	o	i	xx	network	Read output or input xx network properties xx: Device ID or IP address
read	o	i	xx	ipsettings	Read output or input xx IP address properties xx: Device ID or IP address
Command	Output	Input	Number	Control	Description
read o i xx rs232 Read output or input xx					RS-232 propertiesxx: Device ID or IP address
read o i xx properties	Read output or input xx				connection propertiesxx: Device ID or IP address
read o i xx manager Read output or input xx					KVM over IP Matrix Manager IP and port propertiesxx: Device ID or IP address
read o i xx streams Read output or input xx					enable media propertiesxx: Device ID or IP address
read o xx tx Read output xx source					stream IP address propertiesxx: Receiver ID or IP address
read o xx usbmode Read output xx USB					mode propertiesxx: Receiver ID or IP address
read	i		xx multicast Read input		put xx multicast propertiesxx: Transmitter ID or IP address
read	i		xx	videoqtyadvanced	Read input xx advanced video propertiesxx: Transmitter ID or IP address
read	i		xx	ossettings	Read input xx OS propertiesxx: Transmitter ID or IP address
read				all	Read all properties of local Receiver
Command	Output Input Number Control			Description
read basic				network ipsettings rs232 properties manager streams tx usbmode	Read [control] properties of local Receiver.

2. Skip the Output or Input and Number command strings to read the local Receiver properties.

Set Command

The Set command allows you to configure the properties of a device. Some settings require that both the device and KVM over IP Matrix Manager are online or the command will fail. The formula for the Set command is as follows: $$ \text { Command } + \text { Output } + \text { Input } + \text { Number } + \text { Control } + \text { Value } + [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 1. For example, to set the name of the local Receiver to KE6940TX1, type the following: $$ \text { set Name } = \text { KE6940TX1 } [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 2. For example, to set the description of Transmitter (192.168.0.33) to KE Room B, type the following: $$ \text { set o192.168.0.19 Description = KE Room B [Enter] } $$ 3. For example, to set the DHCP settings of Transmitter (192.168.0.28) to static, type the following: $$ \text { set i192.168.0.28 dhcpFlag = STATIC [Enter] } $$ 4. For example, to set the IP settings of the local Receiver to 192.168.0.2, type the following: $$ \text { set ipAddr } = 1 9 2. 1 6 8. 0. 2 [ \text { Enter } ] $$ 5. For example, to set the Transmitter Video IP setting to 192.168.0.44 for Receiver (192.168.0.56), type the following: $$ \text { set o192.168.0.56 TxVideoIP = 192.168.0.44 [Enter] } $$ The following tables show the possible values for the Set command:

Command Description
set Set command

Output Description
o Output command

Input Description
i Input command

Number Description
xx Output or	Input numberxx: Device ID or IP address
Control Description
Name Sets the device name
Description Sets the device description
ipInstallerFlag Sets the IP installer option
dhcpFlag Sets the DHCP setting
ipAddr Sets the IP address
netmask Sets the subnet mask
gw Sets the default gateway
modeFlag Sets the device mode
BaudRate Sets the baud rate setting
Parity Sets the parity setting
DataBit Sets the data bit setting
StopBit Sets the stop bit setting
FlowCtrl Sets the flow control setting
TxVideoIP Sets the Transmitter video IP setting
TxAudioIP Sets the Transmitter audio IP setting
TxUSBIP Sets the Transmitter USB IP setting
TxRSIP	Sets the Transmitter RS-232 IP setting
VideoEnFlag	Sets the (enable media) video source stream
AudioEnFlag	Sets the (enable media) audio source stream
USBEnFlag	Sets the (enable media) USB source stream
RSEnFlag	Sets the (enable media) RS232 source stream
ManagerIP	Sets the KVM over IP Matrix Manager IP
ManagerPort	Sets the KVM over IP Matrix Manager port
Beeper Sets the beeper
RxVM Sets the USB mode setting
USBSecure	Sets the USB encryption
PortOS Sets the port OS setting
OSLanguage	Sets the OS language
videoMCastEn	Sets the enable multicast video setting
Control	Description
audioMCastEn Sets	the enable multicast audio setting
Edid Sets the	EDID mode selection setting
VideoType Sets	the video type setting
ColorDepth Sets	the color depth setting
BandwidthLimit Sets	the bandwidth limit setting
VideoQty Sets	the video quality setting
BGRefresh Sets	the background refresh setting
Beeper Sets	the beeper setting
OccupyTimeout Sets	the occupy timeout setting
Resolution Sets	the resolution setting

Value Description
=yy Set value	to yyyy: Enter a value that corresponds to the control being used

The following table lists the available Set commands:

Command	Output	Input	Number	Control	Value	Description
Set	o	i	xx	Name	yy	Set output or input xx Name to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: Name value
Set	o	i	xx	Description	yy	Set output or input xx Description to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: Description value
SetSet o i	oxx dhcpFlag yy	i$et output	xxor input xx	iplnstallerFlag	yy	Set output or input xx ipInstallerFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, viewonly, disabledhcpFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: dhcp, static
Set o i	xx ipAddr yy	Set output or	input xx			ipAddr to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: IP address value
Set o i	xx netmask yy	Set output or	input xx			netmask to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: Subnet mask value
Set o i	xx gw yy	Set output or	input xx			gw to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: Default gateway value
Set o i	xx modeFlag yy	Set output or	input xx			modeFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: extender, matrix
Set o i	xx BaudRate yy	Set output or	input xx			BaudRate to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 9600, 19200, 38400, 115200
Set o i	xx	Parity	yy Set output or	input xx		Parity to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: none, even, odd
Set o i	xx	DataBit	yy Set output or	input xx		DataBit to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 5, 6, 7, 8
Set o i	xx StopBit yy Set output or input xx					StopBit to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 1, 1.5, 2
Set o i	xx FlowCtrl yy Set output or input xx					FlowCtrl to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: none, hardware, Xon, Xoff
Set o i	xx TxVideoIP yy Set output xx					TxVideoIP to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: IP address value
Set o xx	xx TxAudioIP yy Set output xx					TxAudioIP to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: IP address value
Set o xx	xx TxUSBIP yy Set output xx TxUSBIP					to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: IP address value
Set o xx	xx TxRSIP		yy Set output xx TxRSIP			to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: IP address value
Set o i	xx	VideoEnFlag		yy Set output or input xx		VideoEnFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set o i	xx	AudioEnFlag		yy Set output or input xx		AudioEnFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set o i	xx USBEnFlag yy		Set output or input xx			USBEnFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set o i	xx RSEnFlag yy		Set output or input xx			RSEnFlag to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set o i	xx ManagerIP yy		Set output or input xx			ManagerIP to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: KVM over IP Matrix Manager IP address
Set o i	xx ManagerPort yy		Set output or input xx			ManagerPort to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: KVM over IP Matrix Manager port
Set o i	xx Beeper yy Set output or input xx					Beeper to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set o xx RxVM yy Set output xx RxVM to						yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: vm, vusb
Set o		xx	USBSecure yy Set output xx			USBSecure to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: on, off
Set		i	xx	PortOS	yy	Set input xx PortOS to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: win, mac, sun, other
Set i xx	OSLanguage	yy	Set input	xx		OSLanguage to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: english, japanese, french, german, spanish, korean, chinese(traditional), english(uk), swedish, arabic, belgian, canadian-bilingual, french(canada), czech, danish, finnish, greek, hebrew, hungarian, international(iso), italian, latin american, dutch, norwegian, persian(farsi), polish, portuguese, russian, slovak, french (switzerland), german (switzerland), switzerland, reserved, turkish-q, reserved, serbo-croatian
Set i xx	videoM	CastEn	yy	Set input xx		videoMCastEn to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set i xx	audioM	CastEn	yy	Set input xx		audioMCastEn to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: enable, disable
Set i xx	Edid yy	Set input	xx Edid	to yy		xx: Device ID or IP addressyy: default, auto, manual, remix
Set i xx	VideoType	yy	Set input	xx VideoType		to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: dvi-d, dvi-a
Set i xx	ColorDepth yy	Set input xx	ColorDepth			to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 8, 16, 24,and 36 (only for KE89 Series)
Set i xx	BandwidthLimit	yy Set input xx				BandwidthLimit to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: unlimited, 100, 200,500
Set i xx	VideoQty yy	Set input xx	VideoQty			to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Set i xx	BGRefresh yy	Set input xx	BGRefresh			to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: off, 16, 32, 64, 128,256
Set i xx	OccupyTimeout	yy Set input xx				OccupyTimeout to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 1~240
Set i xx Resolution on yy Set input xx Resolution						to yyxx: Device ID or IP addressyy: 1920x1200, 1920x1080, 1680x1050, 1600x1200, 1600x900, 1440x900, 1400x1050, 1366x768, 1280x1024, 1280x960, 1280x720, 1152x864, 1024x768, 800x600, 720x400, 640x480, 2560x1080, 3840x2160, 1920x1440, 2560x1600, 2560x1440, 2048x1536*Only for KE89 Series

Safety Instructions

General

- This product is for indoor use only. - Read all of these instructions. Save them for future reference. ◆ Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the device. - Do not place the device on any unstable surface (cart, stand, table, etc.). If the device falls, serious damage will result. ♦ Do not use the device near water. - Do not place the device near, or over, radiators or heat registers. - The device cabinet is provided with slots and openings to allow for adequate ventilation. To ensure reliable operation, and to protect against overheating, these openings must never be blocked or covered. - The device should never be placed on a soft surface (bed, sofa, rug, etc.) as this will block its ventilation openings. Likewise, the device should not be placed in a built-in enclosure unless adequate ventilation has been provided. - Never spill liquid of any kind on the device. - Avoid circuit overloads. Before connecting equipment to a circuit, know the power supply’s limit and never exceed it. Always review the electrical specifications of a circuit to ensure that you are not creating a dangerous condition or that one doesn’t already exist. Circuit overloads can cause a fire and destroy equipment. - Unplug the device from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. - The device should be operated from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company. - To prevent damage to your installation it is important that all devices are properly grounded. - Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord or cables. Route the power cord and cables so that they cannot be stepped on or tripped over. - Position system cables and power cables carefully; Be sure that nothing rests on any cables. - Never push objects of any kind into or through cabinet slots. They may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in a risk of fire or electrical shock. - Do not attempt to service the device yourself. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. - If the following conditions occur, unplug the device from the wall outlet and bring it to qualified service personnel for repair. - The power cord or plug has become damaged or frayed. - Liquid has been spilled into the device. - The device has been exposed to rain or water. - The device has been dropped, or the cabinet has been damaged. - The device exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. - The device does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed. \- Only adjust those controls that are covered in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage that will require extensive work by a qualified technician to repair.

Rack Mount

- Before working on the rack, make sure that the stabilizers are secured to the rack, extended to the floor, and that the full weight of the rack rests on the floor. Install front and side stabilizers on a single rack or front stabilizers for joined multiple racks before working on the rack. - Always load the rack from the bottom up, and load the heaviest item in the rack first. - Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a device from the rack. - Use caution when pressing the device rail release latches and sliding a device into or out of a rack; the slide rails can pinch your fingers. - After a device is inserted into the rack, carefully extend the rail into a locking position, and then slide the device into the rack. - Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the rack. The total rack load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. - Make sure that all equipment used on the rack – including power strips and other electrical connectors – is properly grounded. - Ensure that proper airflow is provided to devices in the rack. - Ensure that the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment does not exceed the maximum ambient temperature specified for the equipment by the manufacturer. - Do not step on or stand on any device when servicing other devices in a rack.

Technical Support

International

- For online technical support – including troubleshooting, documentation, and software updates: http://support.aten.com - For telephone support, see Telephone Support, page iv. North America

Email Support support@aten-usa.com
Online Technical Support	Troubleshooting Documentation Software Updates	http://www.aten-usa.com/support
Telephone Support 1-888-999-ATEN		ext 49881-949-428-1111

When you contact us, please have the following information ready beforehand: ◆ Product model number, serial number, and date of purchase. - Your computer configuration, including operating system, revision level, expansion cards, and software. ◆ Any error messages displayed at the time the error occurred. ◆ The sequence of operations that led up to the error. ◆ Any other information you feel may be of help.

Specifications

KE6900T / KE6940T

Function KE6900T KE6940T
Connectors Console Ports	Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
	Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
	Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
	Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
	Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
	RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	KVM Ports	KB / Mouse USB Type B Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)	2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
	Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
	LAN	1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switches	Function	1 x Slide switch (Black)(Auto, RS-232 Config, Local)
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN		1 (Green / Orange)
	Power	1 x Blue
	Local	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse	USB
Power Consumption		DC 5 V, 7.34 W	DC 5 V, 8.91 W
Video Resolution		Up to 1920 x 1200
Environment	Operating Temp.	0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity	0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Function KE6900T KE6940T
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.14 kg 1.15 kg
	Dimensions (L x W x H)	21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm

KE6900R / KE6940R

Function KE6900R KE6940R
Connectors US	B Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)
	Console Ports	Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)	2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
	RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
	LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton
	Video 1 x Pushbutton
	Graphics		1 x Pushbutton
	Function		1 x Slide Switch (Black)(Extension, RS-232 Config)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN			1 (Green / Orange)
	Power		1 x Blue
	Local		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 6.9 W DC 5 V, 9.53 W
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing		Metal
	Weight		1.25 kg 1.25 kg
	Dimensions(L x W x H)		22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm

KE6900AT / KE6940AT

Function KE6900AT KE6940AT
Connectors	Console Ports	Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	KVM Ports	KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		RS-232	1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
	Power		2 x DC Jack (Black)
	LAN		1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)1 x SFP Slot
Switches	Function		1 x Slide switch (Black)(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, Local)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs	LAN		1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power		1 x Blue
	Local		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 7.95 W	DC 5 V, 12.2 W
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Function KE6900AT KE6940AT
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.15 kg (2.53 lb)	1.17 kg (2.58 lb)
	Dimensions(L x W x H)	21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

KE6900AR / KE6940AR

Function KE6900AR KE6940AR
Connectors US	B Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)
	Console Ports	Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female (White)	2 x DVI-I Female (White)
		Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)
	LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black) 1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD			1 x Pushbutton
	Video		1 x Pushbutton
	Graphics		1 x Pushbutton
	Function		1 x Slide Switch (Black) (Extension, RS-232 Config)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power		1 x Blue
	Local		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 6.35 W DC 5 V, 8.51 W
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 - 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 - 60 °C
	Humidity		0-95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing		Metal
	Weight		1.30 kg (2.86 lb) 1.31 kg (2.89 lb)
	Dimensions (L x W x H)		22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm (8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)

KE6900AiT / KE6940AiT

Function KE6900AiT KE6940AiT
Connectors C	console Ports	Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	KVM Ports	KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
		Video 1 x DVI-I Female(White)		2 x DVI-I Female(White)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
	Power		2 x DC Jack (Black)
	LAN		1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)1 x SFP Slot
	Internet Port		1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switches	Function		1 x Slide switch (Black)(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, Local)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs	LAN		1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power		1 x Blue
	Local		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 12 V: 12 W :60 BTU	DC 12 V : 18.36 W :90 BTU
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60Hz
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Function KE6900AiT		KE6940AiT
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.16 kg (2.56 lb)	1.18 kg (2.60 lb)
	Dimensions(L x W x H)	21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm(8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

KE6900ST

Function KE6900ST
Connectors	KVM Ports	KB / Mouse U	USB Type B Female (White)
		Video 1 x DVI-D Male (White)
	RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
	Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
	LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)
Switch Reset 1	x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs LAN 1 (Green / Orange)

Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption 5 V / 7.3 W
Video Resolution			Up to 1920 x 1200
Environment	Operating Temp. 0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing		Metal
	Weight		0.43 kg
	Dimensions(L x W x H)		14.39 x 10.30 x 3.00 cm

KE6910

Function KE6910R		KE6910T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x U		SB Type A Female(White)	N/A
		Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female(White)	2 x USB Type A Female(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female	(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		Power 2 x DC Jack (Black) 2 x DC Jack (Black)
		LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD		1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Video	1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Graphics	1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
	ModeSelection	1 x Slide Switch(Extension, RS-232 Config)	1 x Slide Switch(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, Local)
LEDs	10/100/1000Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
	Local	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard /Mouse	USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 9.02 W DC 5 V, 10.02 W
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x 2048 @ 50 Hz
Environment O	Operating Temp.	0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.26 kg	1.13 kg
	Dimensions (L x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm 2	1.5 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm

KE6912

Function KE6912R		KE6912T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)			N/A


































Power Consumption DC 48 V /		11.27 W (PoE) DC 48 V / 12.53 W (PoE)
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x		2048 @ 50 Hz
Environment O	Operating Temp.	0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.28 kg	1.17 kg
	Dimensions (L x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm 2	1.5 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm

KE6920

Function KE6920R		KE6920T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x U		SB Type A Female(White)	N/A
		Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female(White)	2 x USB Type A Female(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White) 1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black) 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female	(White)
			1 x DVI-D Female (White)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		Power 2 x DC Jack (Black) 2 x DC Jack (Black)
		LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)2 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD		1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Video	1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Graphics	1 x Pushbutton	N/A
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
	ModeSelection	1 x Slide Switch(Extension, RS-232 Config)	1 x Slide Switch(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, Local)
LEDs	10/100/1000Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
	Local	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard /Mouse	USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 8		86 W DC 5 V, 10.87 W
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x		2048 @ 50 Hz / 2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz
Environment O	Operating Temp.	0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.27 kg	(2.8 lb) 1.15 kg (2.53 lb)
	Dimensions (L x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm (8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)	21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm (8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

KE6922

Function KE6922R		KE6922T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)			N/A


































Power Consumption DC 48 V /		11.54 W DC 48 V / 13.59 W
Video Resolution Up to 2560 x		2048 @ 50 Hz / 2560 x 1600 @ 60 Hz
Environment O	Operating Temp.	0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.30 kg	(2.86 lb) 1.18 kg (2.6 lb)
	Dimensions (L x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm (8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)	21.50 x 16.33 x 4.18 cm (8.46 x 6.43 x 1.65 in.)

KE8900S

Function KE8900SR KE8900ST
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (Black)			N/A
Console Ports	2 x USB Type A Female (Black)		N/A
	1 x HDMI Female (Black)
	1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
KVM Ports N/A	1 x USB Type B Female		(White)
			1 x HDMI Female (Black)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
Power 1 x DC	Jack (Black) 1 x DC Jack (Black)
			1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector (Green)
LAN 1 x RJ-45	(Black)
Switches Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs	10/100/1000 Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse	USB
Power Consumption		DC 5V, 4.35 W	DC 5V, 3.8 WDC 48V, 5.53 W
Video Resolution		Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
Environment	Operating Temp.	0–50°C
	Storage Temp.	-20–60°C
	Humidity	0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing	Metal
	Weight	0.64 kg	0.65 kg
	Dimensions (L x W x H)	18.20 x 11.75 x 2.87 cm

KE8950T / KE8952T

Function KE8950T KE8952T
Connectors C	console Ports	Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)
		Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	KVM Ports	KB / Mouse 1 x USB Type B Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack (Pink)
		Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)
		RS-232 1 x DB-9 Female (Black)
	LAN		1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)	1 x RJ-45 Female (Black; PoE)
	LAN		1 x SFP Module Female (Black)
	Power		1 x DC Jack (Black)
Switches	Function		1 x Slide Switch (Black)(Auto, RS-232 Config, Local)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs	LAN		1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power		1 x Blue
	Local		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 6.56 W	DC 48 V, 9.02 W (PoE)
Video Resolution			Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0), 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4)
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Function KE8950T KE8952T
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.10 kg (2.42 lb)	1.13 kg (2.49 lb)
	Dimensions(L x W x H)	21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm(8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)

KE8950R / KE8952R

Function KE8950R KE8952R
Connectors US	B Virtual Media 2 x USB Type A Female (White)
	Console Ports	Keyboard 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Video 1 x HDMI Female (Silver)
		Mouse 1 x USB Type A Female (White)
		Speaker 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Green)
		Mic. 1 x Mini Stereo Jack Female (Pink)
	RS-232 1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	LAN 1 x RJ-45 Female (Black)		1 x RJ-45 Female (Black; PoE)
	LAN 1 x SFP Module Female (Black)
	Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton
	Video		1 x Pushbutton
	Graphics		1 x Pushbutton
	Function		1 x Slide Switch (Black)(Extension, RS-232 Config)
	Reset		1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs	LAN		1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power		1 x Blue
	Local		1 x Green
	Remote		1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard / Mouse		USB
Power Consumption			DC 5 V, 5.65 W DC 48 V, 7.06 W (PoE)
Video Resolution			Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0), 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4)
Environment	Operating Temp.		0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.		-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity		0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Function KE8950R KE8952R
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.23 kg (2.71 lb)	1.26 kg (2.78 lb)
	Dimensions(L x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm(8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)

KE9900ST

Function KE9900ST
Connectors KV	M Ports 1 x USB Type B	Female (White)
		1 x DisplayPort Female (Black)
		1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
	Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)
		1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector (Green)
	LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)
Switches Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
LEDs 10/100/1	1000 Mbps 1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power 1 x Blue
Emulation Keyboard / Mouse USB
Power Consumption DC 5 V, 4.75 W; DC 48 V, 6.97 W
Video Resolution		Up to 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz
Environment	Operating Temp. 0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity	0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing	Metal
	Weight	0.65 kg (1.43 lb)
	Dimensions(L x W x H)	18.20 x 11.75 x 2.87 cm(7.17 x 4.63 x 1.13 in.)

KE9950

Function KE9950R		KE9950T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x U		SB Type A Female(White)	N/A
		Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female (White)




		1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female	(White)
			1 x DisplayPort Female(Black)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		Power 2 x DC Jack (Black)
		LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black)1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Video 1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Graphics	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
	ModeSelection	1 x Slide Switch(Extension, RS-232 Config)	1 x Slide Switch(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, Local)
LEDs	10/100/1000Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
	Local	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard /Mouse	USB
Power Consumption		DC 5 V, 8.03 W	DC 5 V, 9.51 W
Video Resolution		Up to 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz
Environment O	Operating Temp.	0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.24 kg	(2.73 lb) 1.12 kg (2.47 lb)
	Dimensions (L x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm (8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)	21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm (8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)

KE9952

Function KE9952R		KE9952T
Connectors Virtual Media 2 x U		USB Type A Female(White)	N/A
		Console Ports 2 x USB Type A Female (White)




		1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		KVM Ports N/A 1 x USB Type B Female	(White)
			1 x DisplayPort Female(Black)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Green)
			1 x Mini Stereo Jack(Pink)
			1 x DB-9 Male (Black)
		Power 1 x DC Jack (Black)1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)	1 x DC Jack (Black)1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)
		LAN 1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)1 x SFP Slot	1 x RJ-45 (Black, PoE)1 x SFP Slot
Switches OSD	1 x Pushbutton N/A
	Video 1 x Pushbutton
	Graphics 1 x Pushbutton
	Reset	1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
	ModeSelection	1 x Slide Switch(Extension, RS-232 Config)	1 x Slide Switch(Auto, RS-232 Config/Access Control, Local)
LEDs	10/100/1000Mbps	1 (10: Orange / 100: Orange & Green / 1000: Green)
	Power	1 x Blue
	Local	1 x Green
	Remote	1 x Green
Emulation	Keyboard /Mouse	USB
Power Consumption		DC 48 V / 10.04 W (PoE)	DC 48 V / 11.88 W (PoE)
Video Resolution Up to 3840 x		2160 @ 30 Hz
Environment O	Operating Temp.	0 – 50 °C
	Storage Temp.	-20 – 60 °C
	Humidity 0–95% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties	Housing Metal
	Weight 1.27 kg	(2.8 lb) 1.15 kg (2.53 lb)
	Dimensions (L x W x H)	22.75 x 17.16 x 5.48 cm (8.96 x 6.76 x 2.16 in.)	21.50 x 16.29 x 4.18 cm (8.46 x 6.41 x 1.65 in.)

Optional Rack Mount

Optional rack mount kits are available as shown in the following table:

Mount Type Model
Dual Rack Mount Kit* 2X-021G
Single Rack Mount Kit* 2X-031G
Video Extender Rack Mount Kit** (for KE6900ST, KE8900ST, KE8900SR and KE9900ST)	VE-RMK 1U

\*Supports KE6900/KE6900A/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922/KE6940/KE6940A/KE8950/KE8952/KE9950/KE9952. \*\*Please refer to VE-RMK 1U user manual on how to mount these units.

Dual Rack Mount

The 2X-021G Dual Rack Mount Kit installs two KE6900/KE6900A/KE6910/KE6912/KE6920/KE6922/KE6940/KE6940A/KE8950/KE8952/KE9950/KE9952 units side by side in 1U of server rack space.

Transmitter Dual Rack Mount

KE8950T is the example used here. 1. Remove four screws from the units and then use the same screws to secure the units together with the link bracket provided with the kit. ![](images/841740c808bafcc0c6e170551605f5b46dfaaad9d29f464bafc82fb10e978a83.jpg)

text_image

Link Bracket

2. Remove the bottom and side screws from each unit. ![](images/39045bdbd14388c1e2cd853f643e02054b7b1906b72516b4f742dd9ae2746ae7.jpg)

text_image

Remove screws Remove screws

3. Use the screws in step 2 to install the left and right mounting brackets. ![](images/58b3eed3252df49a13a51bdffbc9169c1c2ebc58d4c8974f86e9f9e4aadad006.jpg)

natural_image

Line drawing of a computer monitor chassis with ports and connectors (no text or labels)

4. Screw the mounting brackets onto the rack. ![](images/ce51b49663111ad0685cc83a4e3ed7383290dea55bb2d65f5587b74801670cc0.jpg)

natural_image

Isometric line drawing of a server rack with ventilation grilles and drive bays (no text or symbols)

Receiver Dual Rack Mount

KE8950R is the example used here. 1. Remove the eight screws and plastic guards from the receiver units. ![](images/891aff2530bceb7883afb7778115edf79060ac053f591100b9a5d9f1b2c29c2d.jpg)

text_image

ALTUSON ALTUSON

2. Remove four screws from the units and then use the same screws to secure the units together with the link bracket provided with the kit. ![](images/92a20aa8e42791eab010fd1669263676df8cc8a51c3fc3859f95ee7ba7fdae17.jpg)

text_image

Link Bracket

3. Remove the bottom and side screws from each unit. ![](images/75877ac46d9085bc1863b7f00e63a6837f2444f8e6d046222de400cec41e5c33.jpg)

text_image

Remove Screws Remove Screws

4. Use the screws in step 3 to install the left and right mounting brackets. ![](images/3440822dd62294c049da95ffc7a6fd069912d1da6db002f4a7ce1d393af101b3.jpg)

natural_image

Technical line drawing of a multi-chamber electronic device with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

5. Screw the mounting brackets onto the rack. ![](images/24ef762c6e868bbdefc5fc5682f5b0aad816ede6345ab4ce23eff213fb9aa59f.jpg)

natural_image

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with clamping elements and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)

Single Rack Mount

The 2X-031G Single Rack Mount kit installs one KE6900/KE6940/KE8950/KE8952 unit within a 1U rack space. 1. Remove the eight screws and plastic guards from the unit (receiver units only). ![](images/a9dda052e5d9d6463f284abebdfff1d4ea0abb003332d9f6320bb585bd6984ce.jpg)

text_image

ALTUSON ALTUSON

2. Remove the bottom and side screws from the unit. ![](images/c3dd5840d0f68c733785f58c8ea13d8f366cd2288b282469315024340d14c4b9.jpg)

natural_image

Isometric line drawing of a device rear panel with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

3. Use the screws in step 2 to install the right and left mounting brackets. ![](images/56825e8ec702b7d9a6f55b6b1923dc4473909a82c8194048be3cf7c06b376193.jpg)

natural_image

Technical line drawing of a computer interface unit with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

4. Screw the mounting brackets onto the rack. ![](images/c6e532babad5ce3a21a997125a9ead9d3463007d10bd02a3c4c6ebe5d5f7af65.jpg)

natural_image

Isometric line drawing of a server rack with vertical supports and a central device (no text or symbols)

IP Installer

From a client computer running Windows, an IP address for a transmitter or receiver can be assigned with the IP Installer utility. The utility can be obtained from the Download area of our website or from the product page on the Software & Driver tab. After downloading the utility to your client computer, do the following: 1. Unzip the contents of IPInstaller.zip to a directory on your hard drive. 2. Go to the directory that you unzipped the IPInstaller program to and run IPInstaller.exe. A dialog box similar to the one below appears: ![](images/5cce0cd9cd784e78dc5dbcf599714a8a6d89c280e93be7eda9da2f9c312730c6.jpg)

text_image

Network Device IP Installer Device list: Device Name Model Name MAC Address IP Address KE6900T KE6900T 00-10-74-a9-01-10 172.17.17.67 KE6940T KE6940T 00-10-74-a9-01-35 172.17.17.61 KE6900R KE6900R 00-10-74-a8-01-12 172.17.17.60 KE6940R KE6940R 00-10-74-a8-01-35 172.17.17.80 SN3101 SN3101 00-10-74-42-00-31 172.17.17.18 Protocol: IPv4 Network adapter: MAC: 00-19-db-ea-8c-d3, IP: 172.17.17.20 IPv4 settings Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP) Use the following IP address: IP address: 172 . 17 . 17 . 67 Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0 Default gateway: 172 . 17 . 17 . 254 Enumerate Set IP IPv6 address: Subnet prefix length: Default gateway:

3. Select the Transmitter or Receiver in the Device List. Note: 1. If the list is empty, or your device doesn't appear, click Enumerate to refresh the Device List. 2. If there is more than one device in the list, use the MAC address to pick the one you want. The MAC address is located on the devices bottom panel. 4. Select either Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP), or Specify an IP address. If you chose the latter, fill the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields with the information appropriate to your network. 5. Click Set IP. 6. After the IP address shows up in the Device List, click Exit.

Trusted Certificates

Overview

When you try to log in to the device from your browser, a Security Alert message appears to inform you that the device's certificate is not trusted, and asks if you want to proceed. ![](images/ac739b9d444860a2b6f32209ef5bfbd277619b00d8e7324a6d9778516ebae370.jpg)

text_image

Security Alert Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others. However, there is a problem with the site's security certificate. The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust. View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority. The security certificate date is valid. The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed? Yes No View Certificate

The certificate can be trusted, but the alert is triggered because the certificate's name is not found on the Microsoft list of Trusted Authorities. You can ignore the warning and click Yes to go on.

Self-Signed Private Certificates

If you wish to create your own self-signed encryption key and certificate, a free utility – openssl.exe – is available for download over the web at www.openssl.org. To create your private key and certificate do the following: 1. Go to the directory where you downloaded and extracted openssl.exe to. 2. Run openssl.exe with the following parameters: openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509 -keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf Note: 1. The command should be entered all on one line (i.e., do not press [Enter] until all the parameters have been keyed in). 2. If there are spaces in the input, surround the entry in quotes (e.g., "ATEN International"). To avoid having to input information during key generation the following additional parameters can be used: /C /ST /L /O /OU /CN /emailAddress.

Examples

openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509 -keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf -subj "/C=yourcountry/ST=yourstateorprovince/L=yourlocationor city/O=yourorganization/OU=yourorganizationalunit/ CN=yourcommonname/emailAddress=name@yourcompany.com
openssl req -new -newkey rsa:1024 -days 3653 -nodes -x509 -keyout CA.key -out CA.cer -config openssl.cnf -subj "/C=CA/ST=BC/L=Richmond/O=ATEN International/OU=ATEN /CN=ATEN/emailAddress=eservice@aten.com.tw

Importing the Files

After the openssl.exe program completes, two files – CA.key (the private key) and CA.cer (the self-signed SSL certificate) – are created in the directory that you ran the program from.

Reset All Information

To reset all information (including passwords) to their default settings, follow the steps below: 1. Power off the unit and remove its housing. 2. Use a jumper cap to short the mainboard pins labeled DEFAULT PASSWORD. An example is shown: ![](images/80c499143684d70c8a2cce158dbeb6e5a116ded564c9e9de874bdfa2e1a6a890.jpg)

natural_image

Top-down schematic of an electronic circuit board layout with components and connectors (no text or labels)

3. Power on the unit. 4. After the unit is turned on, power off the unit. 5. Remove the jumper cap from the Reset pins and close the housing. 6. Power on the unit again. After powering on the unit, you can use the default administrator Username and Password (see Logging In, page 199) to log in.

Default Password Pins

The Default Password pins for different models are shown below. KE6900ST ![](images/9486f24c4f611d64e3347a4c8536a834c3dad77e7f1e945e0fb3762f91a1f3df.jpg)

natural_image

Top-down architectural floor plan showing room layouts and structural elements (no text or labels)

KE6900AR ![](images/09e0728d075c824fc399fdb58fbdad30eb89ce42030c58ddb86a24eb93da68ad.jpg)

natural_image

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

KE6900AT ![](images/52426998f0b48c2bd28428490e9f37c85da38947bc22b8c84846eee9caaef5cd.jpg)

natural_image

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

KE6900AiT ![](images/fef8293d2a53ff7f24ed8c97f6dccfe2c9f56b6efa72cd6bb637b238d039f3d1.jpg)

natural_image

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

KE6940AR ![](images/670e3df55e2d5814d4eb8085542f38c46a0df6be8218051c3c533c4dbc2e7c4b.jpg)

natural_image

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

KE6940AT ![](images/744f770b0649ab8024fd323c228e867d190eedda2eb32984b37ff10ceb8443aa.jpg)

natural_image

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

KE6940AiT ![](images/75716bf7a9cf60d4ceb43c53333817ea93c596976ba3571ced6c6282aa26452e.jpg)

natural_image

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

■ KE6910R / KE6912R ![](images/164c9ae2f9217822213190cd7d11b68faeacdba9f2f6fc74c7452933cacca3bb.jpg)

natural_image

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard layout with connectors and slots (no text or labels)

■ KE6910T / KE6912T ![](images/25b2878704ea5be16b2aa24fa83a7443503b42b0eb6aeb58a57bd54af4a21ff7.jpg)

natural_image

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard layout showing CPU socket, RAM slots, and indicator lights (no text or labels)

■ KE6920R / KE6922R ![](images/bebe9dee38ee68f9eaf7a0e57d707a6e1d256de90193325d53f6ac8c69b9ba73.jpg)

natural_image

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard layout with labeled components and connectors (no text or symbols)

■ KE6920T / KE6922T ![](images/a80c385c10080fd14f54c02c96fe56a97c72ee08a0c9797d40397890cc44051f.jpg)

natural_image

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard layout with connectors and a central circuit board (no text or labels)

KE8900SR ![](images/d272e406fa6b54e10710ae4a0ddbdba091bd238c82eedcbdc70b4269c7b51427.jpg)

natural_image

Pure technical diagram of a circuit board layout without any text, numbers, or symbols

KE8900ST ![](images/d2bb38df6ccc6fa2cce156f3d0067cb6a4500128329a1db63b5a0f797001c64f.jpg)

natural_image

Top-down schematic of a computer motherboard showing connector layout and mounting points (no text or labels)

■ KE8950R / KE8952R ![](images/987fca3203319ccc31695377125ae15791126f51a6cc97a88929e49eadf3804f.jpg)

natural_image

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

■ KE8950T / KE8952T ![](images/665b576cf4ba8ed2dd2d3c105db10e500fd845f089537db7d7ac56bb82d462a9.jpg)

natural_image

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

KE9900ST

![](images/6500e69897c828026458f2ab9bdeb51c3bd3e3e3855a6a4e25b2c0db7631ef3b.jpg)

natural_image

Technical line drawing of a computer motherboard with multiple connectors and a grid-patterned circuit board (no text or symbols)

■ KE9950R / KE9952R

![](images/7d8424d3e688713125872a94d75c0412ad3a6f2cbf530f3df36f13135dfd4ea0.jpg)

natural_image

Top-down schematic of an electronic device layout with components and connectors (no text or labels)

■ KE9950T / KE9952T

![](images/355288772a1aa972f93127826ec44fb62efec15ec9a5d18f5c22a6ec79037ec5.jpg)

natural_image

Floor plan diagram of a computer room with multiple electronic components and a central storage unit (no text or labels)

RS-232 Pin Assignments

Pin assignments for the Transmitter and Receiver's rear RS-232 port that is used for connecting to a serial terminal are given in the table, below:

Pin Assignment
1 N/A None
2 RXD Receive Data
3 TXD Transmit Data
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready
5 GND Signal Ground
6 DSR Data Set Ready
7 RTS Request to Sent
8 CTS Clear to Sent
9 N/A None

Transmitter Front RS-232 Port

Pin assignments for the Transmitter's front RS-232 port that is used for connecting to a computer for serial control are given in the table, below:

Pin Assignment
1 N/A None
2 TXD Transmit Data
3 RXD Receive Data
4 DSR Data Set Ready
5 GND Signal Ground
6 DTR Data Terminal Ready
7 CTS Clear to Sent
8 RTS Request to Sent
9 N/A None

Multicast IP Address

Multicasting helps to broadcast audio and video data from a transmitter to multiple Receivers over a network. To setup up Multicasting on a network switch you must know the Audio and Video Multicast IP address which can be found on the KE Transmitter. To determine the default Multicast IP address set by the KE device use the instructions below. The Multicast IP addresses can be set manually using Telnet.

KE Multicast Rule

All Audio and Video Multicast IP addresses use the format: 230.X.Y.Z. X.Y.Z relates to the Transmitter's IP address and 230 is always the first octet of a Multicast IP address. You use the Transmitter's IP address to find X and then use it to calculate the Audio and Video Multicast IP address.

Multicast IP Formula

To calculate the Audio and Video Multicast IP address, use the Transmitter's IP address to determine X and then use the appropriate table below to calculate the Multicast IP address for each data stream (audio/video).

Example:

Transmitter IP Address: 172.16.27.146; (172.X.Y.Z) X = 16 If X is between 0 \~ 127

Transmitter IP X		VideoX + 128	AudioX + 192	MulticastVideo IPAddress	MulticastAudio IPAddress
172.16.27.146(example)	16	6 ± 128 = 144	16 + 192 = 208	230.144.27.146	230.208.27.146
		____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._.._._	230._.._._
		____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._.._._	230._.._._
		____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._.._._	230._.._._

If X is between 128 \~ 192

Transmitter IP	X - 128 = A	Video A + 128	Audio A + 192	Multicast Video IP Address	Multicast Audio IP Address
172.168.27.14 (example)	168 - 128 = 40	40 + 128 = 168	40 + 192 = 232	230.168.27.14	230.232.27.14
	____- 128 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._._	230._._._._
	____- 128 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._._	230._._._._
	____- 128 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._._	230._._._._

If X is 192 or higher

Transmitter IP	X - 192 = A	Video A + 128	Audio A + 192	Multicast Video IP Address	Multicast Audio IP Address
172.200.27.14 (example)	200 - 192 = 8	8 + 128 = 136	8 + 192 = 200	230.136.27.14	230.200.27.14
	____- 192 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._._	230._._._._
	____- 192 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._._	230._._._._
	____- 192 =	____+ 128 =	____+ 192 =	230._._._._	230._._._._

Keys to Network Performance

For optimum performance, KE Series devices requires high amounts of data to be transferred across a network; therefore we recommend the following strategies to setup KE Series devices. Using our suggestions will provide better performance and the highest video resolutions possible. Use each of the keys to ensure the best transmission of data and the highest throughput possible.

Build a Network Diagram

To build an effective KE installation, start by mapping out the layout. Create a diagram with the KE devices, computers and routers along with how they will be connected across the network. It also helps to write out how the devices will interact. Use this diagram as the frame work as you decide what devices to purchase and how to build the network effectively for the best data throughput.

Considerations:

◆ If possible, create a private network for the KE devices ◆ Use the same switch model throughout ◆ Use a flat cascaded layout - Avoid a tree or pyramid structure ♦ Limit cascades to two levels ◆ Install network switches near each other ♦ Minimize the distance of connections - Install KVM over IP Matrix Manager (CCKM) computer and KE devices on the same subnet ◆ Check the 3 Other Factors before installation

Other Factors

■ Choose the Right Cable

Always use Cat 5/6e Ethernet cable or higher installed by a professional between any two devices you are installing. We recommend using ATEN Brand Ethernet cable to ensure the quality. It's best when installing KE devices to use brand new Ethernet cabling for each part of the installation to ensure the reliability of the data being transmitted. This is a key to getting the best uninterrupted video resolution across the network.

■ Determine the Distance

Distance is an important factor when setting up networks, with a shorter distance and fewer hops through routers, data can be transmitted more efficiently. So whenever possible decrease the distance and direct network traffic effectively between subnets that communicate with each other to increase the data throughput.

■ Ensure the Bandwidth

Ensuring the bandwidth ahead of time will guarantee performance before installing KE devices on a network. This will eliminate the primary cause of problems related to video quality and transmission of data. If the speed is right at all ends of your network, then the only other causes are derived from device failure or limits caused by a router, switch or device setting. Sample Network Diagram ![](images/51ea738e6dd2de3dc684ea41815054cee34888667c6753409909606a85bf9411.jpg)

flowchart

graph TD
    subgraph_KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        PC1["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        KE6900T -->|Console port| KE6900T
    end
    subgraph_KE6900R["KE6900R"]
        KE6900R1["KE6900R"] -->|Console port| KE6900R
        KE6900R -->|Console port| KE6900R
    end
    subgraph_KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        PC2["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        KE6900T -->|Console port| KE6900T
    end
    subgraph_KE6900R["KE6900R"]
        KE6900R1["KE6900R"] -->|Console port| KE6900R
        KE6900R -->| console port| KE6900R
    end
    subgraph_KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        PC3["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        KE6900T -->|Console port| KE6900T
    end
    subgraph_KE6900R["KE6900R"]
        KE6900R1["KE6900R"] -->|Console port| KE6900R
        KE6900R -->| Console port| KE6900R
    end
    subgraph_KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        PC4["PC"] -->|KVM port| KE6900T["KE6900T"]
        KE6900T -->|Console port| KE6900T
    end
    subgraph_KE6900R["KE6900R"]
        KE6900R1["KE6900R"] -->|Console port| KE6900R
        KE6900R -->| KVM port | KE6900T
    end

Choose a High Performance Switch

A high performance network switch is the means of a successful KE setup. When choosing a network switch, first select the type:

Layer 2 or Layer 3 Switches

You'll need to determine whether you need a layer 2 or a layer 3 switch for your KE network. Layer 3 switches cost more than layer 2 switches because they are more complex and handle more network traffic. The best way to calculate which type of switch you need is to first determine if you will have a dedicated network for the KE devices or if the KE devices will be on a network that shares throughput with other network equipment such as computers, servers and printers. If they share the network with other devices its best to consider a layer 3 switch and use layer 2 switches exclusively for the KE device connections. For larger installations we recommend using Layer 3 switches. The major differences are: Layer 3 Switch: IP addresses in packets are examined and intelligent forwarding decisions are made. On a larger network broken into subnets across long distances, a layer 3 switch becomes the best choice as they can improve network efficiency and provide better traffic flow. They are better at directing more traffic to different locations on a larger more complex network, and with layer two switches working below them. Layer 2 Switch: Packets are examined and forwarded using only the MAC address. If you have a small central network, a layer 2 switch should do the job. If the network is exclusive and will only transmit the bandwidth of KE devices, layer 2 switches with the correct settings can get the job done effectively.

Considerations

Number of ports

Choose a switch that has enough ports to match the number of KE devices you will be installing. Switches typically come in 5, 8, 10, 16, 24, 28, 48, and 52-port configurations. If you are installing 13 KE transmitters and 13 KE receivers, you will need to purchase a switch with at least 28 ports.

Stackable verse Standalone

Stackable switches allow you to easily manage and configure ports spanning across multiple switches that the KE devices are connected through. This provides a centralized method to configure and troubleshoot the initial setup of KE devices on a network which makes fine tuning the bandwidth, data throughput and video quality easier. Stackable switches can be configured to direct the KE transmissions between many units more specifically and effectively. Standalone switches provide the same configuration features as Stackable switches but they must be set individually. Stackable switches provide an easy way to manage multiple switches, as one unit. For example, instead of configuring, managing, and troubleshooting 6 28-port switches individually, you can manage the six as if they are a single unit using Stackable Switches. The six switches (168 ports) function as a single switch and are managed from one web or GUI interface.

What Stackable Switches Can do:

1. Create a link aggregation group with one port in one unit of the stack and another port of that group in another switch in the stack. 2. Select a port on one switch in the stack and mirror the traffic to a switch port on another unit of the stack; thus copy the configuration to direct traffic more effectively between KE devices. 3. Apply custom ACL security settings to any port on any switch in the stack. 4. Stackable switches can be setup in a ring configuration, so that if a port or cable fails, the stack automatically routes around the failure, at microsecond speeds. Stackable Switches also allow you to add and remove stack “members” which are automatically updated and recognized as such.

Switch Specifications

The following specifications are recommended when choosing a layer 2 or layer 3 switch: ◆ 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet switches (1000Mbps or faster Ethernet ports) ◆ High bandwidth between switches, if possible using Fibre Channel - Layer 3 switches that efficiently processes IGMP queries ♦ IGMP Snooping v2 or v3 ◆ Flow Control Functions ◆ Throughput of: Full Duplex, 1Gbps up- and down- stream speeds per port ◆ Performance of their most onerous tasks (e.g. IGMP snooping) with multiple dedicated processors (ASICS) ◆ Use the same switch make and model throughout each subnet \- The maximum number of simultaneous ‘snoopable groups’ the switch can handle meets or exceeds the number of KE transmitters that will be used to create Channel groups

Configuring Switches and KE Devices

Configuring the switch correctly will pass data more efficiently, allowing a better stream across the network to each KE device. The following settings will help optimize your network traffic through a switch: ◆ Enable IGMP Snooping on L2 switches ◆ Enable IGMP Querier on the L3 switch - Enable IGMP Fast-Leave on all switches where KE units are directly connected - Enable Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on all switches and enable Portfast exclusively on switch ports that have KE units connected - Pick an appropriate forwarding mode on all switches. Use Cut-through if available, or Store and Forward (see Recommended Network Switches below)

KE transmitter Settings:

- Adjust the KE transmitter settings one at a time, in small intervals, and view the images as you do, so that you can adjust to the positive or negative results and achieve the best quality and bandwidth possible - If the quality of color is important, set the Color Depth to 24 bits (KE69, KE89, KE99 Series) and manually adjust other settings until you are satisfied with the visual appearance - If moving video images are shown frequently, increase the Video Quality setting to the highest level and reduce the Bandwidth Limit and Color Depth setting. - When images on the screen are more often static, increase the Background Refresh and/or the Video Quality settings - Check that all KE units have been updated with the latest firmware version

Recommended Network Switches

Below are the network switches that have passed ATEN's stress tests using the KE Series extenders. Our tests streamed content over a network with a resolution of 1920 x 1200 @60Hz (KE69 Series, KE8900S, KE9900ST); 24 bit color depth and 3840 x 2160 @ 60 Hz (4:2:0), 3840 x 2160 @ 30 Hz (4:4:4); 24 bit color depth. ♦ Cisco Catalyst 2960X / Catalyst 2960XR / Catalyst 3750 HP Procurve 2920 ◆ H3C S5120 Huawei S5700 ◆ DLink DGS-1510 Please refer to the FAQ link below on how to select network switches and network switch information collected by ATEN Customer Service Division, where the collected information includes customer's feedback from their actual experience in using and installing the product(s). https://eservice.aten.com/eServiceCx/Common/FAQ/view.do?id=6276

Additional Mouse Synchronization Procedures

If the mouse synchronization procedures mentioned in the manual fail to resolve mouse pointer problems for particular computers, try the following:

Windows:

Note: In order for the local and remote mouses to synchronize, you must use the generic mouse driver supplied with the MS operating system. If you have a third party driver installed - such as one supplied by the mouse manufacturer - you must remove it. 1. Windows 2000: a) Open the Mouse Properties dialog box (Control Panel Mouse Mouse Properties) b) Click the Motion tab c) Bring the mouse speed to the middle position (6 units in from the left) d) Set the mouse acceleration to None ![](images/21805139f154bcb53d097547b8e09765ddf2efa3c8ff5caf18d4ed9a66765bb9.jpg)

text_image

Mouse Properties Buttons Pointers Motion Hardware Speed Adjust how fast your pointer moves Slow Fast Acceleration Adjust how much your pointer accelerates as you move it faster! None Low Medium High Snap to default OK Move pointer to the default button in dialog boxes OK Cancel Apply

2. Windows XP / Windows Server 2003 / Windows 7 / Windows 8 / Windows 10: a) Open the Mouse Properties dialog box (Control Panel → Mouse) (For Windows 10, click Start → Devices → Mouse → Additional mouse options) b) Click the Pointer Options tab c) Bring the mouse speed to the middle position (6 units in from the left) d) Disable Enhance Pointer Precision ![](images/bc971197237d2d00dc705a4b58eebeab3d3961f9055452f41bc06947dc14ef21.jpg)

text_image

Mouse Properties Buttons Pointers Pointer Options Wheel Hardware Motion Select a pointer speed: Slow Fast Enhance pointer precision Snap To Automatically move pointer to the default button in a dialog box Visibility Display pointer trails Short Long Hide pointer while typing Show location of pointer when I press the CTRL key OK Cancel Apply

3. Windows ME: Set the mouse speed to the middle position; disable mouse acceleration (click Advanced to get the dialog box for this). 4. Windows NT / Windows 98 / Windows 95: Set the mouse speed to the slowest position.

Sun / Linux

Open a terminal session and issue the following command: Sun: xset m 1 Linux: xset m 0 or xset m 1 (If one does not help, try the other.)

Virtual Media Support

WinClient ActiveX Viewer / WinClient AP

- IDE CDROM/DVD-ROM Drives – Read Only ♦ IDE Hard Drives – Read Only - USB CDROM/DVD-ROM Drives – Read Only - USB Hard Drives – Read/Write\* - USB Flash Drives – Read/Write\* - USB Floppy Drives – Read/Write \* These drives can be mounted either as Drives or Removable Disks (see Virtual Media, page 321). Mounting them as removable disks allow booting the remote server if the disk contains a bootable OS. In addition, if the disk contains more than one partition, the remote server can access all the partitions. ♦ ISO Files – Read Only ◆ Folders – Read/Write Smart Card Readers

Java Applet Viewer / Java Client AP

♦ ISO Files – Read Only - Folders – Read/Write Note: 1. The Java Client supports Virtual Media in the same way as WinClient does – however, the account should have Administrator level privilege. 2. Folder mapping uses a FAT16 file system, so there is a 2G limitation. Virtual Media only supports ISO files less than 4G.

Setup CCKM Server IP address on Windows

1. Select Network and Sharing Center and click Change adapter settings. 2. Right-click Local Area Connection and select Properties. 3. In the Local Area Connection Properties window, highlight Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) then click Properties. 4. Select Use the following IP address and enter in the IP for the CCKM server (e.g. any IP address not in use, and in between 192.168.0.2 and 192.168.0.253)\*, Subnet Mask (e.g. 255.255.255.0), and Default Gateway that corresponds with your network setup. 5. Click OK to change the CCKM server's IP address. Note: Make sure the CCKM server's IP address is not a duplicate to prevent IP address conflict. To connect to the CCKM server via web browser, enter the CCKM IP address and port number (default: 8443). For example, if the CCKM IP address is 192.168.0.10, then enter https://192.168.0.10: 8443. If you have a 2nd NIC, please follow the following steps. 6. Select Network and Sharing Center and click Change adapter settings. 7. Right-click Local Area Connection for the 2nd NIC and select Properties. 8. In the Local Area Connection Properties window, highlight Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) then click Properties. 9. Select Use the following IP address and enter in the IP of the 2nd subnet for the CCKM server (e.g. any IP address not in use, and in between 192.168.1.2 and 192.168.1.253)\*, Subnet Mask (e.g. 255.255.255.0), and Default Gateway that corresponds with your network setup. 10. Click OK to change the CCKM server's IP address of the 2nd subnet.

Limited Warranty

ATEN warrants its hardware in the country of purchase against flaws in materials and workmanship for a Warranty Period of two [2] years (warranty period may vary in certain regions/countries) commencing on the date of original purchase. This warranty period includes the LCD panel of ATEN LCD KVM switches. Select products are warranted for an additional year (see A+ Warranty for further details). Cables and accessories are not covered by the Standard Warranty.

What is covered by the Limited Hardware Warranty

ATEN will provide a repair service, without charge, during the Warranty Period. If a product is detective, ATEN will, at its discretion, have the option to (1) repair said product with new or repaired components, or (2) replace the entire product with an identical product or with a similar product which fulfills the same function as the defective product. Replaced products assume the warranty of the original product for the remaining period or a period of 90 days, whichever is longer. When the products or components are replaced, the replacing articles shall become customer property and the replaced articles shall become the property of ATEN. To learn more about our warranty policies, please visit our website: http://www.aten.com/global/en/legal/policies/warranty-policy/ © Copyright 2022 ATEN® International Co., Ltd. Released: 2022-06-08 ATEN and the ATEN logo are registered trademarks of ATEN International Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. All other brand names and trademarks are the registered property of their respective owners.